Yamaha PSR-292 Handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: PSR-292

Categorie: Digitale piano's

Type: Handleiding

Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

Portatone PSR-292

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL

This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO NOT

connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one described

in the manual, on the name plate, or speciﬁcally recommended by Yamaha.

This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart,

rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is used, please

observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory

product.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:

The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time

of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of

the speciﬁcations without notice or obligation to update existing units.

This product, either alone or in combination with an ampliﬁer and head-

phones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could

cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a

high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any

hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist.

IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before dam-

age occurs.

NOTICE:

Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a func-

tion or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered

by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility.

Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting

service.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:

Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmen-

tally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production meth-

ods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter

and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following:

Battery Notice:

This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if applica-

ble) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is

approximately ﬁve years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a

qualiﬁed service representative to perform the replacement.

This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these may be

rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a rechargeable

type and that the charger is intended for the battery being charged.

When installing batteries, do not mix batteries with new, or with batteries of a

different type. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect

installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture.

Warning:

Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batteries

away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by

the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of household type batter-

ies in your area for battery disposal information.

Disposal Notice:

Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its

useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and

federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead,

batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist you, please contact

Yamaha directly.

NAME PLATE LOCATION:

The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model number,

serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should

record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the

spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your

purchase.

Model

Serial No.

Purchase Date

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

92-BP

(bottom)

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in

this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modiﬁcations not expressly

approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use

the product.

2. IMPORTANT:

When connecting this product to accessories and/or

another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied

with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure

to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product

in the USA.

3. NOTE:

This product has been tested and found to comply with the

requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital

devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level

of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will

not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equip-

ment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used

according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause inter-

ference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance

with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in

all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference,

which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to

eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the

interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse)

circuits or install AC line ﬁlter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the

antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial

type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please

contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you

can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corpora-

tion of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave,

Buena Park, CA90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by

Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

Entsorgung leerer Batterien (nur innerhalb Deutschlands)

Leisten Sie einen Beitrag zum Umweltschutz. Verbrauchte Batterien oder

Akkumulatoren dürfen nicht in den Hausmüll. Sie können bei einer Sam-

melstelle für Altbatterien bzw. Sondermüll abgegeben werden. Informieren

Sie sich bei Ihrer Kommune.

(class B)

(battery)

OBSERVERA!

Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) sá länge som den ar

ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av.

ADVARSEL:

Netspæendingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt, sálæenge

netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t endt — ogsá selvom der or

slukket pá apparatets afbryder.

VAROITUS:

Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko laitetta

verkosta.

(standby)

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical

shock, short-circuiting, damages, ﬁre or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Only use the voltage speciﬁed as correct for the instrument. The required

voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.

• Use the speciﬁed adaptor (PA-3C or PA-3B or an equivalent recommended by

Yamaha) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument

or overheating.

• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have

accumulated on it.

• Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators,

and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects

on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll

anything over it.

• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or

modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it

should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it

inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet

conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into

any openings.

• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.

A burning item may fall over and cause a ﬁre.

• If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a

sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or

smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch,

disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected

by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage

to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold

the plug itself and not the cord.

• Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or during

electrical storms.

• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector.

Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the

outlet.

• Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the +/- polarity

markings. Failure to do so might result in overheating, ﬁre, or battery ﬂuid

leakage.

• Always replace all batteries at the same time. Do not use new batteries together

with old ones. Also, do not mix battery types, such as alkaline batteries with

manganese batteries, or batteries from different makers, or different types of

batteries from the same maker, since this can cause overheating, ﬁre, or battery

ﬂuid leakage.

• Do not dispose of batteries in ﬁre.

• Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not intended to be charged.

• When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be used for a long time,

remove the batteries from the instrument to prevent possible leakage of the

battery ﬂuid.

• Keep batteries away from children.

• If the batteries do leak, avoid contact with the leaked ﬂuid. If the battery ﬂuid

should come in contact with your eyes, mouth, or skin, wash immediately with

water and consult a doctor. Battery ﬂuid is corrosive and may possibly cause

loss of sight or chemical burns.

• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or

heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to

prevent the possibility of panel disﬁguration or damage to the internal

components.

• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment,

mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio

may generate noise.

Power supply/AC power adaptor

Do not open

Water warning

Fire warning

If you notice any abnormality

Power supply/AC power adaptor

Battery

Location

(4)-8

1/2

(4)-8

2/2

• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally

fall over.

• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and other cables.

• Use only the stand speciﬁed for the instrument. When attaching the stand or

rack, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the

internal components or result in the instrument falling over.

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the

power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all

components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes

of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume

controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.

• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners,

solvents, cleaning ﬂuids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.

• Do not insert a ﬁnger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.

• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel

or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the

power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualiﬁed

Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might

discolor the panel or keyboard.

• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not

use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.

• Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or

uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you

experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.

Saving and backing up your data

• Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save

important data to external media such as the Yamaha MDF3 MIDI data ﬁler.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

When using a power adaptor, even when the power switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still ﬂowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not

using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet.

Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations.

●

Regarding the song (or composition) “Just The Way You Are” included in this keyboard

Composition Title : Just The Way You Are

Composer’s Name : Billy Joel

●

This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has

license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, styles ﬁles, MIDI ﬁles,

WAVE data and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant

laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.

●

Trademarks

• Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

• Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft

Corporation.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.

Connections

Maintenance

Handling caution

Saving data

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modiﬁcations to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may be different from the ones on your instrument.

Congratulations on your purchase of the Yamaha PSR-292 PortaTone!

You now own a portable keyboard that combines advanced functions, great sound

and exceptional ease-of-use in a highly compact package. Its outstanding features

also make it a remarkably expressive and versatile instrument.

Read this Owner’s Manual carefully while playing your new PSR-292 in order to

take full advantage of its various features.

Main Features

The PSR-292 is a sophisticated yet easy-to-use keyboard with the following features and functions:

■ Stereo Sampled Piano .......................................................................... page 20

The PSR-292 has a special Portable Grand Piano Voice — created by state-of-the-art stereo sampling technol-

ogy and using Yamaha’s sophiscated AWM (Advanced Wave memory) tone generation system.

■ Touch Response .................................................................................... page 30

The exceptionally natural Touch Response feature, with a convenient front panel on/off switch, gives you maxi-

mum expressive level control over the voices. It also works in conjunction with the Dynamic Filter, which

dynamically adjusts the timbre or tone of a voice according to your playing strength — just a like a real musical

instrument!

■ Yamaha Education Suite ......................................................... pages 43, 45, 61

The PSR-292 features the new Yamaha Education Suite — a set of learning tools that utilize the latest technol-

ogy to make studying and practicing music more fun and fulﬁlling than ever before!

■ One Touch Setting ................................................................................. page 28

The One Touch Setting feature lets you automatically call up an appropriate voice for playing with the selected

style. Each style has memory space for two One Touch Settings, and you can change them to your own desired

voice setting — letting you save your custom panel settings for instant recall.

■ Powerful Speaker System

The built-in stereo ampliﬁer/speaker system of the PSR-292 — with a special Bass Boost feature — provides

exceptionally powerful, high-quality sound, letting you hear the full dynamic range of the PSR-292’s authentic

voices.

■ Music Database ..................................................................................... page 48

The PSR-292 has an advanced, easy-to-use Music Database feature that automatically selects the style, voice,

and effect settings for playing in a speciﬁc type of music. This can be a big help if you know what genre of

music you want to play, but you don’t know what settings to make. Just select the genre, and the PSR-292 takes

care of the rest!

■ GM System Level 1

“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music data

can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM mark is

afﬁxed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level.

■ XGlite

As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simpliﬁed version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone generation format. Natu-

rally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in mind that some songs

may play back differently compared to the original data, due to the reduced set of control parameters and effects.

Panel Controls and Terminals ........................ 8

Setting Up....................................................... 10

• Power Requirements ........................................10

• Turning On the Power.......................................11

• Accessory Jacks ...............................................11

Quick Guide 12

Step 1 Voices ........................................................... 12

Step 2 Songs............................................................ 14

Step 3 Music Database............................................. 16

Panel Display Indications .............................18

Portable Grand............................................... 20

• Playing the Portable Grand...............................20

• Using the Metronome .......................................20

DJ .................................................................... 22

• Playing the DJ...................................................22

Playing Voices ...............................................23

• Playing a Voice .................................................23

• #000 OTS .........................................................26

• Dual Voice ........................................................26

• Split Voice.........................................................27

• Setting the Split Point .......................................27

• One Touch Setting............................................28

• Transpose and Tuning......................................29

• Touch and Touch Sensitivity.............................30

Effects............................................................. 31

• Harmony ...........................................................31

• Reverb ..............................................................31

• Chorus ..............................................................32

• DSP ..................................................................32

Selecting and Playing Styles ........................ 35

• Selecting a Style ...............................................35

• Playing the Styles .............................................36

• Sync Stop .........................................................40

• Changing the Tempo ........................................41

• Accompaniment Sections (Main A/B and Fill-ins).

• Adjusting the Style Volume...............................42

• Using Auto Accompaniment — Multi Fingering 43

• Dictionary..........................................................45

Using the Music Database ............................ 48

• Data stored by the Music Database..................50

Selecting and Playing Songs ....................... 51

• Selecting a Song...............................................51

• Playing the Songs.............................................53

• A-B Repeat .......................................................54

• Melody Voice Change.......................................55

• Adjusting the Song Volume ..............................55

Song Recording............................................. 56

• Recording a User Song ....................................56

• Song Clear........................................................59

• Track Clear .......................................................60

Song Lesson.................................................. 61

• Using the Lesson Feature.................................61

• Select the Lesson Track ...................................63

• Lesson 1 — Timing...........................................63

• Lesson 2 — Waiting..........................................64

• Lesson 3 — Minus One ....................................64

• Lesson 4 — Both Hands...................................65

• Grade................................................................65

MIDI Functions............................................... 66

• What Is MIDI? ...................................................66

• Connecting to a Personal Computer.................68

• Local Control.....................................................69

• Using Initial Setup Send with a Sequencer.......69

• External Clock...................................................69

• Bulk Data Send.................................................69

• Keyboard Out....................................................70

• Style Out ...........................................................70

• Song Out...........................................................70

• Loading a Song into PSR-292’s Flash Memory 71

• PC Mode...........................................................73

Function ......................................................... 74

• Using the Function parameters.........................74

Troubleshooting ............................................ 77

Data Backup & Initialization ......................... 78

Voice List ....................................................... 79

Style List ........................................................ 86

Music Database List...................................... 87

Drum Kit List.................................................. 88

MIDI Implementation Chart........................... 90

Effect map ...................................................... 92

Specifications ................................................ 93

Index ............................................................... 94

Contents

Panel Controls and Terminals

Power switch ([STANDBY/ON])

[MASTER VOLUME] dial

This determines the overall volume of the PSR-292.

[TOUCH] button

This turns the Touch function on and off. (See page

30.)

[HARMONY] button

This turns the Harmony effect on and off. (See page

31.)

[DUAL] button

This turns the Dual voice on or off. (See page 26.)

[SPLIT] button

This turns the Split voice on and off. (See page 27.)

[DICTIONARY] button

This calls up the Dictionary function (page 45).

[DJ] button

This instantly calls up a special DJ voice and style.

[PC] Button

This exceptionally convenient control lets you store

and instantly call up the speciﬁed MIDI settings for

optimum use with a connected computer or other

MIDI device. (See page 73.)

LESSON [L] (Left) and [R] (Right) buttons

These call up the Lesson exercises for the correspond-

ing hand (left or right) for the selected song. (See

page 62.)

[METRONOME] button

This turns the metronome on and off. (See page 20.)

[PORTABLE GRAND] button

This instantly calls up the Grand Piano voice. (See

page 12.)

[DEMO] button

This is used to play the Demo song. (See page 14.)

[FUNCTION] Button

This calls up the Function mode and stores the speci-

ﬁed panel setting to the ﬂash memory (see pages 74,

78).

[SONG] button

This is for enabling song selection. (See page 51.)

[STYLE] button

This is for enabling style selection. (See page 35.)

[VOICE] button

This is for enabling voice selection. (See page 23.)

Holding down this button calls up the Melody Voice

Change function. (See page 55.)

[M.D.B.] (MUSIC DATABASE) button

This calls up the optimum panel settings for selected

music genre. (See page 48.)

Dial, CATEGORY [ ]/[ ] buttons,

SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons

This dial is used to select the number of the desired

song, voice, style or M.D.B.. (See page 24.) This

also used to set the Tempo and Function value.

The CATEGORY [ ]/[ ] buttons are used to select

■

Front Panel

001092

GrandPno

001

u i

!1 !2

@4 @6@3

@5 @7

@8 @9

Panel Controls and Terminals

the category of songs, voices, styles, M.D.B. or Func-

tions. Pressing the buttons steps through the various

categories.

The SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons are used to decrease

or increase the number of the desired song, voice,

style, M.D.B., or speciﬁc Function, as well as to

adjust certain settings.

Numeric keypad, [+/YES] and [-/NO] but-

tons

These are used for selecting songs, voices, and styles.

(See pages 24.) They are also used for adjusting cer-

tain settings and answering certain display prompts.

[ACMP] / [A-B REPEAT] button

When the Style mode is selected, this turns the auto

accompaniment on and off. (See page 36.) In the

Song mode, this calls up the A-B Repeat function.

(See page 54.)

[SYNC STOP] button

This turns the Sync Stop function on and off. (See

page 40.)

[SYNC START] / [PAUSE] button

This turns the Sync Start function on and off. (See

page 37.) In the Song mode, it is used to temporarily

pause song playback. (See page 53.)

[INTRO ENDING] / [REW

] button

When the Style mode is selected, this is used to con-

trol the Intro and Ending functions. (See page 36.)

When the Song mode is selected, this is used as a

“rewind” control, or move the song playback point

back toward the beginning.

[MAIN/AUTO FILL] / [FF

] button

When the Style mode is selected, these are used to

change auto accompaniment sections and control the

Auto Fill function. (See page 42.) When the Song

mode is selected, this is used as a “fast forward” con-

trol, or move the song playback point toward the end.

[START/STOP] button

When the Style mode is selected, this alternately starts

and stops the style. (See page 36.) In the Song mode,

this alternately starts and stops song playback. (See

page 54.)

[TEMPO/TAP] button

This button is used to call up the Tempo setting, let-

ting you set the Tempo with the dial, numeric keypad

or [+]/[-] buttons. (See page 20.) It also allows you to

tap out the tempo and automatically start a selected

song or style at that tapped speed. (See page 37.)

ONE TOUCH SETTING buttons

These buttons ([MEMORY], [1], [2]) are used to

select the One Touch Setting registrations. (See page

28.)

SONG MEMORY buttons

These buttons ([REC], [1] - [5], [A]) are used for song

recording, letting you record up to six different tracks

of a song (including a special Chord track). (See page

57.)

■ Rear Panel

#1 #2

#0 MIDI IN, OUT terminals

These are for connection to other MIDI instruments

and devices. (See page 67.)

#1 SUSTAIN jack

This is for connection to an optional FC4 or FC5

Footswitch for control over sustain, just like the

damper pedal on a piano. (See page 11.)

#2 PHONES/OUTPUT jack

This is for connection to a set of stereo headphones or

to an external ampliﬁer/speaker system. (See page

11.)

#3 DC IN 12V jack

This is for connection to a PA-3C or PA-3B AC power

adaptor. (See page 10.)

Setting Up

This section contains information about setting up your PSR-292 for playing. Make sure to

read this section carefully before using the instrument.

Although the PSR-292 will run either from an optional AC adaptor or batteries,

Yamaha recommends use of an AC adaptor whenever possible. An AC adaptor is

more environmentally friendly than batteries and does not deplete resources.

■ Using an AC Power Adaptor • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

q Make sure that the [STANDBY/ON] switch of the PSR-292 is set to

STANDBY.

w Connect the AC adaptor (PA-3C, PA-3B, or other adaptor speciﬁcally recom-

mended by Yamaha) to the power supply jack.

e Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet.

■ Using Batteries • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

For battery operation the PSR-292 requires six 1.5V “D” size, R20P (LR20) or

equivalent batteries. (Alkaline batteries are recommended.) When the batteries

need to be replaced, the volume may be reduced, the sound may be distorted, and

other problems may occur. When this happens, turn the power off and replace the

batteries, as described below

q Open the battery compartment cover located on the instrument’s bottom panel.

w Insert the six new batteries, being careful to follow the polarity markings on

the inside of the compartment.

e Replace the compartment cover, making sure that it locks ﬁrmly in place.

Power Requirements

• Never interrupt the power sup-

ply (e.g. remove the batteries

or unplug the AC adaptor) dur-

ing any PSR-292 record opera-

tion! Doing so can result in a

loss of data.

• Never attempt to turn the

power off when a “WRITING!”

message is shown in the dis-

play. Doing so can damage the

internal ﬂash memory and

result in loss of data.

• Use ONLY a Yamaha PA-3C or

PA-3B AC Power Adaptor (or

other adaptor speciﬁcally rec-

ommended by Yamaha) to

power your instrument from

the AC mains. The use of other

adaptors may result in irrepa-

rable damage to both the adap

tor and the PSR-292.

• Unplug the AC Power Adaptor

when not using the PSR-292,

or during electrical storms.

• When the batteries run down,

replace them with a complete

set of six new batteries.

NEVER mix old and new bat-

teries.

• Do not use different kinds of

batteries (e.g. alkaline and

manganese) at the same time.

• If the instrument is not to be in

use for a long time, remove the

batteries from it, in order to

prevent possible ﬂuid leakage

from the battery.

Setting Up

With the AC power adaptor connected or

with batteries installed, simply press the

power switch until it locks in the ON posi-

tion. When the instrument is not in use, be

sure to turn the power off. (Press the switch

again so that it pops up.)

■ Using Headphones• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

For private practicing and playing without dis-

turbing others, connect a set of stereo headphones

to the rear panel PHONES/OUTPUT jack.

Sound from the built-in speaker system is auto-

matically cut off when you insert a headphone

plug into this jack.

■ Connecting a Keyboard Ampliﬁer or Stereo System • • • • • • •

Though the PSR-292 is equipped with a built-in

speaker system, you can also play it through an

external ampliﬁer/speaker system. First, make

sure the PSR-292 and any external devices are

turned off, then connect one end of a stereo audio

cable to the LINE IN or AUX IN jack(s) of the

other device and the other end to the rear panel

PHONES/OUTPUT jack on the PSR-292.

■ Using a Footswitch • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

This feature lets you use an optional footswitch

(Yamaha FC4 or FC5) to sustain the sound of the

voices. The footswitch functions the same way

as a damper pedal on an acoustic piano — press

and hold down the footswitch as you play the

keyboard to sustain the sound.

■ Using the MIDI Terminals • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

The PSR-292 also features MIDI terminals,

allowing you to interface the PSR-292 with other

MIDI instruments and devices. (For more infor-

mation, see page 67.)

Turning On the Power

• Even when the switch is in the “STANDBY” position,

electricity is still ﬂowing to the instrument at the mini-

mum level. When you are not using the PSR-292 for a

long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor

from the wall AC outlet, and/or remove the batteries

from the instrument.

• Never attempt to turn the power off when a “WRITING!”

message is shown in the display. Doing so can damage

the internal ﬂash memory and result in loss of data.

Accessory Jacks

Stereo System

• To prevent damage to the

speakers, set the volume of the

external devices at the mini-

mum setting before connect-

ing them. Failure to observe

these cautions may result in

electric shock or equipment

damage. Also, be sure to set

the volumes of all devices at

their minimum levels and grad

ually raise the volume controls

while playing the instrument to

set the desired listening level.

• Make sure that the footswitch

plug is properly connected to the

SUSTAIN jack before turning on

the power.

• Do not press the footswitch while

turning the power on. Doing this

changes the recognized polarity

of the footswitch, resulting in

reversed footswitch operation.

MIDI

instrument

001092

GrandPno

001

zz qr

Press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button.

Play the keyboard.

Want to ﬁnd out more? See page 20.

001

GrandPno

Simply by pressing the [PORTABLE GRAND] button, you can automatically select the Grand Piano voice.

Press the [METRONOME] button.

Want to ﬁnd out more? See page 20.

Playing along with the Metronome

Step 1 Voices

Quick

Guide

No. Voice Name

PIANO

001 Grand Piano

002 Bright Piano

003 Honky-tonk Piano

004 MIDI Grand Piano

005 CP 80

006 Harpsichord

E.PIANO

007 Galaxy EP

008 Funky Electric Piano

009

DX Modern Elec. Piano

010 Hyper Tines

011 Venus Electric Piano

012 Clavi

ORGAN

013 Jazz Organ 1

014 Jazz Organ 2

015 Click Organ

016 Bright Organ

017 Rock Organ

018 Purple Organ

019 16'+2' Organ

020 16'+4' Organ

021 Theater Organ

022 Church Organ

023 Chapel Organ

024 Reed Organ

No. Voice Name

ACCORDION

025

Traditional Accordion

026 Musette Accordion

027 Bandoneon

028 Harmonica

GUITAR

029 Classical Guitar

030 Folk Guitar

031 12Strings Guitar

032 Jazz Guitar

033 Octave Guitar

034 Clean Guitar

035 60’s Clean Guitar

036 Muted Guitar

037 Overdriven Guitar

No. Voice Name

038 Distortion Guitar

BASS

039 Acoustic Bass

040 Finger Bass

041 Pick Bass

042 Fretless Bass

043 Slap Bass

044 Synth Bass

045 Hi-Q Bass

046 Dance Bass

STRINGS

047 String Ensemble

048 Chamber Strings

049 Synth Strings

050 Slow Strings

No. Voice Name

051 Tremolo Strings

052 Pizzicato Strings

053 Orchestra Hit

054 Violin

055 Cello

056 Contrabass

057 Banjo

058 Harp

CHOIR

059 Choir

060 Vocal Ensemble

061 Vox Humana

062 Air Choir

No. Voice Name

● Panel Voice List

Playing the Piano

* This list includes only a portion of the total available voices.

Step 1 Voices

Press the [VOICE] button.

001

GrandPno

The PSR-292 has a huge total of 605 dynamic and realistic instrument voices. Let’s try a few of them out now...

Select a voice.

Play the keyboard.

002

BritePno

• You can also select the appropriate category

by using the [ ]/[ ] buttons.

Want to ﬁnd out more? See page 23.

Press the [DJ] button.

Play the DJ style.

The DJ starts as soon as you play keys in the accompa-

niment area of the keyboard.

000

DJ Set 1

Accompaniment

area

The exciting new DJ feature gives you a full variety of dance and DJ sounds — letting you create your own real-time mixes

and groove along with various contemporary rhythms.

Play the DJ voices.

Stop the DJ style.

Want to ﬁnd out more? See page 22.

No. Voice Name

SAXOPHONE

063 Soprano Sax

064 Alto Sax

065 Tenor Sax

066 Breathy Tenor

067 Baritone Sax

068 Oboe

069 English Horn

070 Bassoon

071 Clarinet

TRUMPET

072 Trumpet

073 Muted Trumpet

074 Trombone

075 Trombone Section

076 French Horn

077 Tuba

BRASS

078 Brass Section

079 Big Band Brass

080 Mellow Horns

081 Synth Brass

082 Jump Brass

083 Techno Brass

FLUTE

084 Flute

085 Piccolo

086 Pan Flute

No. Voice Name

087 Recorder

088 Ocarina

SYNTH LEAD

089 Square Lead

090 Sawtooth Lead

091 Voice Lead

092 Star Dust

093 Brightness

094 Analogon

095 Fargo

SYNTH PAD

096 Fantasia

097 Bell Pad

098 Xenon Pad

No. Voice Name

099 Equinox

100 Dark Moon

PERCUSSION

101 Vibraphone

102 Marimba

103 Xylophone

104 Steel Drums

105 Celesta

106 Tubular Bells

107 Timpani

108 Music Box

DRUM KITS

109 Standard Kit 1

110 Standard Kit 2

No. Voice Name

111 Room Kit

112 Rock Kit

113 Electronic Kit

114 Analog Kit

115 Dance Kit

116 Jazz Kit

117 Brush Kit

118 Symphony Kit

119 SFX Kit 1

120 SFX Kit 2

No. Voice Name

Selecting and Playing Other Voices

Playing with the DJ Feature

Quick

Guide

Step 2 Songs

001092

GrandPno

001

xcr

The PSR-292 is packed with a total of 100 songs, including one Demo song — which has been specially created to show-

case the rich and dynamic sounds of the instrument. There are also 99 additional songs, designed to be used with the edu-

cational Lesson feature.

You can also play songs loaded to the PSR via MIDI. The songs can be stored to song numbers 101-199. (See page 71.)

Let’s play the Demo song now, Repeating with #001.

Start the Demo song.

Stop the Demo song.

Playing the Demo song

001

Just You

You can also play back songs of other categories. Simply

select the appropriate number of the desired song during

playback.

• The PSR-292 also has a Demo and DJ Cancel function that allows

you to disable Demo song and DJ function.

Set Demo and DJ Cancel in the Function mode (page

76).

Naturally, you can also individually select and play back

the PSR-292’s songs (001 - 205).

Press the [SONG] button.

Select a song.

Start (and stop) the song.

Want to ﬁnd out more? See page 51.

Playing a single song

001

Just You

002

B Bailey

• You can also select the appropriate category by using the [ ]/[ ]

buttons.

Playing the Songs

Step 2 Songs

Start recording by playing a melody on

the keyboard.

The PSR-292 starts recording as soon as you

play the ﬁrst note on the keyboard.

To stop recording, press the [START/

STOP] button.

Want to ﬁnd out more? See page 56.

No. Song Name

Demo

001 Just The Way You Are

Favorites

002 Bill Bailey (Won’t You Please

Come Home)

003 When Irish Eyes Are Smiling

004 Down By The Riverside

005 America The Beautiful

006 When The Saints Go

Marchin’ In

Orchestra

007 Frühlingsstimmen

008 Danse Des Mirlitons From

“The Nutcracker”

009 “Orphée Aux Enfers” Ouver-

ture

010 Slavonic Dances No.10

011 La Primavera (From Le Quat-

tro Stagioni)

012 Méditation De Thais

013 Guillaume Tell

014 Camptown Races

015 Frühlingslied

016 Ungarische Tänze Nr.5

Pianist

017 Dolly’s Dreaming And Awak-

ening

018 La Candeur

019 Arabesque

020 Pastorale

021 Petite Réunion

022 Innocence

023 Progrès

024 Tarentelle

025 La Chevaleresque

026 Etude Op.10-3 “Chanson De

L’adieu”

027 Marcia Alla Turca

028 Turkish March

029 Valse Op.64-1 “Peiti Chien”

030 Menuett

031 Nocturne Op.9-2

032 Moments Musicaux Op.94-3

033 The Entertainer

034 Prelude (Wohltemperierte

Klavier 1-1)

035 La Viollette

036 Für Elise

Practice

037 Little Brown Jug

038 Loch Lomond

039 Oh! Susanna

040 Greensleeves

041 Aura Lee

042 Londonderry Air

043 Ring De Banjo

044 Wenn Ich Ein Vöglein Wär ?

045 Die Lorelei

046 Funiculi-Funicula

047 Turkey In The Straw

048 Old Folks At Home

049 Silent Night

050 Jingle Bells

No. Song Name

051 Muss I Denn

052 Liebesträume Nr.3

053 Jesu, Joy Of Man’s Desiring

054 Symphonie Nr.9

055 Song Of The Pearl Fisher

056 Gavotte

057 String Quartet No.17 2nd

Mov. “Serenade”

058 Menuett

059 Canon

060 The Danube Waves

061 From “The Magic Flute”

062 Piano Sonate Op.27-2

“Mondschein”

063 “The Surprise” Symphony

064 To A Wild Rose

065 Air de Toréador “Carmen”

066 O Mio Babbino Caro (From

“Gianni Schicchi”)

Duet

067 Row Row Row Your Boat

068 On Top Of Old Smoky

069 We Wish You A Merry Christ-

mas

070 Scarborough Fair

071 Im Mai

072 O Christmas Tree

073 Mary Had A Little Lamb

074 Ten Little Indians

075 Pop Goes The Weasel

076 Twinkle Twinkle Little Star

No. Song Name

077 Close Your Hands, Open

Your Hands

078 The Cuckoo

079 O Du Lieber Augustin

080 London Bridge

Chord Lesson

081 Twinkle Twinkle Little Star

082 Close Your Hands, Open

Your Hands

083 The Cuckoo

084 O Du Lieber Augustin

085 London Bridge

086 American Patrol

087 Beautiful Dreamer

088 Battle Hymn Of The Republic

089 Home Sweet Home

090 Valse Des Fleurs (From “The

Nutcracker”)

091 Aloha Oe

092 I’ve Been Working On The

Railroad

093 My Darling Clementine

094 Auld Lang Syne

095 Grandfather’s Clock

096 Amazing Grace

097 My Bonnie

098 Yankee Doodle

099 Joy To The World

100 Ave Maria

No. Song Name

● Song List

Select the desired User song (201 - 205) for recording.

Simultaneously hold down the [REC] button and press

the desired track number button ([1] - [5]).

202

User 2

• You can also select the appropriate category

by using the [ ]/[ ] buttons.

202

User 2

Recording Your Own Song

Much like a multi-track tape recorder, the PSR-292 lets you play and record the individual parts of your own song in real

time.

Quick

Guide

001092

GrandPno

001

v z

Press the [M.D.B.] (MUSIC DATABASE) button.

001

AlvFever

Here’s a convenient feature that lets you instantly reconﬁgure the

PSR-292 for playing in different music styles. If you want to per-

form in a certain genre but don’t know what settings to make,

simply select the genre from the Music Database — and the PSR-

292 makes all the right settings for you!

Accompaniment

area

Left hand

Auto accompaniment

(for example,

bass + guitar + drums)

Right hand

Melody

• For more infomation on playing proper chords for the auto accompa-

niment, see “Using Auto Accompaniment — Multi Fingering” on page

43 and “Looking up Chords in the Dictionary” on the next page.

Select a Music Database.

Refer to the Music Database List on page 87.

002

Croco Rk

• You can also select the appropriate category by using the

[ ]/[ ] buttons.

Step 3 Music Database

Music Database

Step 3 Music Database

The convenient Dictionary function teaches you how to play chords by showing you the individual notes. In the example

below, we’ll learn how to play a GM7 chord...

Press the [DICTIONARY] button.

Specify the root note of the chord (in this case,

G).

Learning how to play a specific chord

Keys for entering

the chord type

(C3 – B4)

Keys for entering

the chord root

(C5 – B5)

Keys for entering

the chord

(C1 – B2)

GM7

Root note Chord type

Example:

Dict.

Specify the chord type of the chord (in this

case, M7).

Play the notes of the chord as indicated in the

keyboard diagram in the display. The chord

name ﬂashes when the chord is played prop-

erly.

To leave the Dictionary function, press the

[DICTIONARY] button again

Want to ﬁnd out more? See page 45.

Chord area

Play a chord with your left hand.

The style starts as soon as you play

the keyboard, letting you play the

melody along with accompani-

ment. For more on chords, see

“Looking up Chords in the Dictio-

nary” above.

Stop the style.

Want to ﬁnd out more? See page 48.

Accompaniment

area

Looking up Chords in the Dictionary

Panel Display Indications

The PSR-292 features a large multi-function display that shows all important settings for the

instrument. The section below brieﬂy explains the various icons and indications in the display.

001

GrandPno

092 001

q Notation

e Beat marks

!2 Chord

r Song/Voice/Style/M.D.B.

name and number

!3 Song track

indicators

t Touch indicator

y Harmony indicator

u Dual indicator

i Split indicator

o Accompaniment On

indicator

!0 Sync Stop indicator

!1 Measure and Tempo

w Keyboard

!4 Octave indicator

Notation /

Keyboard

These two portions of the display conveniently indi-

cate notes. When a song is being played back, they

show the melody or chord notes in succession. When

you play the keyboard yourself, the display shows the

notes you play.

Beat marks

These marks (one large, three small) ﬂash in sequence

and in time with the song or style. The large arrow

indicates the ﬁrst beat of the measure.

Song/Voice/Style/M.D.B. name and number

This portion of the display indicates the name and

number of the currently selected song, voice, style or

M.D.B. It also displays the category name when

using the category button, or the name and current set-

ting/value of other functions, as well as other impor-

tant operation messages.

Touch indicator

This appears when the Touch function is turned on.

(See page 30.)

Harmony indicator

This appears when the Harmony effect is turned on.

(See page 31.)

Dual indicator

This appears when the Dual function is turned on.

(See page 26.)

Split indicator

This appears when the Split function is turned on.

(See page 27.)

Accompaniment On indicator

This appears when the auto accompaniment is turned

on. (See page 36.)

• For a few speciﬁc chords, not all notes may be shown in the nota-

tion section of the display. This is due to space limitations in the

display.

Panel Display Indications

Sync Stop indicator

This appears when the Sync Stop function is turned

on. (See page 40.)

Measure and Tempo

These show the current measure during playback of a

song or style, and the currently set Tempo value for

the song or style.

Chord

When a song (with chords) is being played back, this

indicates the current chord root and type. It also indi-

cates chords played in the ACMP area of the keyboard

when the Style mode and auto accompaniment are on.

Song track indicators

In song recording and playback, these indicate the sta-

tus of the tracks. (See page 57.)

Octave indicator

When note data exceeds the range limit of note dis-

play, the “8va” indication appears in the display.

Music Stand

Insert the bottom edge of the included music stand into

the slot located at the top rear of the PSR-292 control

panel.

Portable Grand

This convenient function lets you instantly call up the Grand Piano voice.

Press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button.

Doing this automatically selects the special “Stereo Sampled Piano” Grand Piano

voice.

1 Call up the Tempo setting.

Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button.

2 Change the value.

Use the dial or numeric keypad to set the desired Tempo value, or use the

[+]/[-] buttons to increase or decrease the value.

Playing the Portable Grand

001

GrandPno

Using the Metronome

Current Tempo value

148

TEMPO

148

Restoring the Default Tempo

Value

Each song and style has been

given a default or standard Tempo

setting. If you’ve changed the

Tempo, you can instantly restore

the default setting by pressing both

[+]/[-] buttons simultaneously

(when Tempo is selected).

You can also restore the default

Tempo easily by simultaneously

holding the [TEMPO/TAP] button

and moving the dial.

Portable Grand

3 Turn on the Metronome.

Press the [METRONOME] button.

To turn the Metronome off, press the [METRONOME] button again.

1148

Indicates the beat number

in the measure.

Setting the Metronome Time Signature

The time signature of the Metronome can be set to var-

ious quarter-note based meters.

The Time Signature can be set in the Function mode

(page 76).

• The time signature changes automatically when a style or song is

selected.

Numeric

keypad

Time signature

01 1/4 — Plays only “1” beats (all high clicks)

02 2/4

03 3/4

04 4/4

: :

15 15/4

0 Plays no “1” beats (all low clicks)

Time Sig

Indicates current beat number.

Adjusting the Metronome Volume

You can adjust the volume of the Metronome sound in the Function mode (page 76). The volume range is 000 -

127.

This exciting feature lets you instantly call up a dynamic DJ voice and style for playing contem-

porary dance music.

1 Press the [DJ] button.

Doing this automatically resets the entire instrument for playing the spe-

cially programmed DJ voice.

2 Play the DJ style.

Play keys in the accompaniment area of the keyboard.

3 Play the DJ voices.

Play the upper area of the keyboard.

4 Stop the DJ style.

Playing the DJ

000

DJ Set 1

• The PSR-292 has a Demo song

and DJ Cancel function that

allows you to disable Demo song

and DJ function.

Set Demo and DJ Cancel in the

Function mode (page 76).

Accompaniment

area

• When the DJ style is selected,

the accompaniment is triggered

by only the root of the chord, let-

ting you play with one ﬁnger.

Reverse

FXTBrs

Ohh1

Scratch 1

Scratch 3

Joo

Huihu

Huea

GetUp

Scratch 2

Scratch 4

Scratch 5

Accompaniment area

(C1 – F#2)

Ohh2 FX02

● For example, when 601 “DJ Set 1” is selected:

Playing Voices

The PSR-292 features a total of 605 authentic voices — all of which have been created with

Yamaha’s sophisticated AWM (Advanced Wave Memory) tone generation system. These

include 480 XG voices and drum kits.

The PSR-292 also has a Dual Voice or Split Voice function that lets you combine two different

voices in a layer, or play from separate areas of the keyboard, play the two together across the

keyboard.

1 Press the [VOICE] button.

2 Select the desired voice number.

The categories of each voice and their numbers are shown on the panel. A

complete voice list of the available voices is given on page 79.

■ Use the CATEGORY [ ]/[ ] buttons, dial or the SELECT [ ]/

[ ] buttons.

● Select the voice CATEGORY

Using the CATEGORY [ ]/[ ] button jumps through the voice num-

bers according to their category divisions.

Playing a Voice

001

GrandPno

Voice name and number

• Selecting the #000 OTS voice

calls up a convenient feature —

automatically selecting an appro-

priate voice to best match the

current style or song.

GUITAR

Category name

Playing Voices

● Select the voice number

Select a voice by using the dial or the SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons.

■ Use the numeric keypad.

There are two ways to select voices: 1) directly entering the voice number

with the numeric keypad, or 2) using the [+]/[-] buttons to step up and down

through the voice numbers.

● Using the numeric keypad

Enter the digits of the voice number as listed on page 79. For example, to

select voice #109, press “1” on the numeric keypad, then “0”, “9.” For

voice numbers beginning with zeroes (such as #042 or #006), the initial

zeroes may be omitted. In this case, there is a short pause before the indi-

cation appears.

● Using the [+]/[-] buttons

Press the [+] button to select the next voice number, and press the [-] but-

ton to select the previous voice. Holding down either button continuously

scrolls up or down through the numbers.

032

Jazz Gtr

109

Std.Kit1

• Each voice is automatically

called up with the most suitable

octave range setting. Thus, play-

ing middle C with one voice may

sound higher or lower than

another voice at the same key.

Playing Voices

3 Play the selected voice.

Since either the Style, Song or M.D.B. mode is active in the background, you

can also play styles, songs or M.D.B., respectively, in the Voice mode by

simply pressing the [START/STOP] button. The last selected style, song or

M.D.B. will be played.

The following par

ameteres can be set in the Function mode (page 75).

CATEGORY SELECT

Main Voice Volume

Octave

Pan

Reverb Send Level

Chorus Send Level

DSP Send Level

Ride Cymbal 1

Tambourine

Cowbell

Vibraslap

Bongo L

Hi-Hat Open

Crash Cymbal 1

Hi-Hat Pedal

Conga H Open

Timbale L

Agogo L

Brush Slap

Castanet

Sticks

Open Rim Shot

Side Stick

Brush Tap

Hand Clap

Hi-Hat Closed

Maracas

Guiro Short

Claves

Cuica Mute

Triangle Mute

Shaker

Chinese Cymbal

Ride Cymbal Cup

Splash Cymbal

Crash Cymbal 2

Ride Cymbal 2

Bongo H

Conga H Mute

Mid Tom L

Mid Tom H

High Tom

Low Tom

Floor Tom H

Conga L

Snare H Soft

Bass Drum Soft

Bass Drum Hard

Bass Drum

Snare M

Snare H Hard

Floor Tom L

Brush Swirl

Brush Tap Swirl

Snare Roll

Seq Click H

Timbale H

Agogo H

Cabasa

Samba Whistle H

Samba Whistle L

Guiro Long

Wood Block H

Wood Block L

Cuica Open

Triangle Open

Jingle Bell

Bell Tree

Drum Kit Voice List (voices 109-120)

When one of the 12 Drum Kit voices is selected, you

can play different drum and percussion instrument

sounds from the keyboard.

• For more details, see page 88.

No. Name LCD

109 Standard Kit 1 Std.Kit1

110 Standard Kit 2 Std.Kit2

111 Room Kit Room Kit

112 Rock Kit Rock Kit

113 Electronic Kit Elct.Kit

114 Analog Kit AnlogKit

115 Dance Kit DanceKit

116 Jazz Kit Jazz Kit

117 Brush Kit BrushKit

118 Symphony Kit SymphKit

119 SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit1

120 SFX Kit 2 SFX Kit2

● For example, when 109 “Standard Kit 1” is selected:

Playing Voices

This special “voice” is actually a convenient feature which automatically selects a

suitable voice for you when you select a style. The voice is selected to best match

the style or song you’ve called up.

Select voice #000 (OTS).

The Dual Voice function lets you combine two different voices in a layer — one

the Main voice, which is selected normally, and the other the Dual voice, which is

selected in the Function mode (pa

ge 75). You can also set various parameters

independently for these voices, such as giving them separate volume, octave, Pan,

Reverb, Chorus, and DSP settings. This lets you create an optimum mix for the

voices, and enhance the way they blend together.

The following par

ameters can be set in the Function mode (page 75).

To turn the Dual Voice on or off, press the [DUAL] button.

CATEGORY SELECT

Dual Voice Voice

Volume

Octave

Pan

Reverb Send Level

Chorus Send Level

DSP Send Level

#000 OTS

#000 OTS is selected.

000

GrandPno

Dual Voice

001

GrandPno

Indicates Dual

Voice is on.

Playing Voices

The Split Voice function lets you assign two different Voices to opposite areas of

the keyboard, and play one Voice with your left hand while your right plays

another.

For example, you could play bass with the left hand and play piano with the right.

The right-hand (or upper) Voice is selected in the Main Voice mode (page 23), and

the left-hand (or lower) Voice is selected in the Function mode (pa

ge 75), along

with the other Split Voice parameters shown below.

The following par

ameters can be set in the Function mode (page 75).

To turn the Split Voice on or off, press the [SPLIT] button.

The Split Point determines the highest key for the split voice and sets the split

point.

Split P

oint can be set in the Function mode (page 75).

CATEGORY SELECT

Split Voice Voice

Volume

Octave

Pan

Reverb Send Level

Chorus Send Level

DSP Send Level

Split Voice

001

GrandPno

Indicates Split

Voice is on.

Setting the Split Point

• This setting also affects the split

point for the accompaniment

area.

Split Point

Split Voice Main Voice

Playing Voices

This convenient feature automatically selects the voice to best match the selected

style — simply by pressing one of the two One Touch Setting buttons. Two types

of One Touch Settings are available.

For each style, you can create and store your own custom One Touch Settings.

●

One Touch Setting Parameters

* Accompaniment is automatically set to on.

Synchro Start is automatically set to on (when style is stopped).

■

Calling up a One Touch Setting. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Select the style.

Press the ONE TOUCH SETTING button [1] or [2].

Main Voice Voice Number Effect DSP Type

Volume Harmony On/Off

Octave Harmony Type

Pan Harmony Volume

Reverb Send Level

Chorus Send Level

DSP Send Level

Dual Voice ON/Off

Voice Number

Volume

Octave

Pan

Reverb Send Level

Chorus Send Level

DSP Send Level

One Touch Setting

• One Touch Setting does not func

tion in the Song mode.

OTS 2

Playing Voices

■ Creating and Storing a One Touch Setting. • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

You can also create and store your own custom One Touch Settings for each of the

styles.

1 Select the desired style.

2 Make the desired settings.

Change the voice and make any other settings you want to use with the

selected style and the One Touch Setting buttons.

3 Press and hold the [MEMORY] button then press the

appropriate button — ONE TOUCH SETTING button [1] or

[2].

You can also adjust the tuning and change the transposition (key) of the entire

PSR-292 sound with the Transpose and Tuning functions.

■ Transpose • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Transpose determines the key of both the main voice and the bass/chord accompa-

niment. It also determines the pitch of the songs. This allows you to easily match

the pitch of the PSR-292 to other instruments or singers, or play in a different key

without changing your ﬁngering. The Transpose settings can be adjusted over a

range of ± 12 semitones (± 1 octave).

ranspose can be set in the Function mode (page 75).

■ Tuning • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Tuning determines the ﬁne pitch setting of both the main voice and the bass/chord

accompaniment. It also determines the pitch of the songs. This allows you to

accurately match the tuning with that of other instruments. The Tuning settings

can be adjusted over a range of ± 100 (approx. ± 1 semitone).

uning can be set in the Function mode (page 75).

WRITING!

Restoring the Default One

Touch Setting data

Each One Touch Setting can be

restored to its default. To do this,

simply press and hold the appropri

ate One Touch Setting button, [1] or

[2]. To restore both buttons to their

defaults, simultaneously press and

hold both the [1] and [2] buttons.

Transpose and Tuning

• The Transpose function has no

effect on the Drum Kits voices

(#109 - #120) and DJ voices

(#601 - #605).

• The Tuning settings have no

effect on the Drum Kit voices

(#109 - #120).

Playing Voices

The Touch function gives you dynamic, expressive control over the voices, letting

you determine how loud or soft the sound is by your playing strength.

Turn the Touch function on or off as desired by pressing

the [TOUCH] button.

Touch Sensitivity lets you set how the PSR-292 responds to your playing strength,

allowing you to customize the keyboard to suit your own playing style.

The default Touch Sensitivity is 2 (Medium).

Sensitivity can be set in the Function mode (pa

ge 75).

● Settings:

When Touch is turned off, a constant volume (corresponding to a velocity value of

80) is produced.

1 (Soft) This results in limited touch response, and produces a relatively narrow

dynamic range, no matter how lightly or strongly you play the keys.

2 (Medium) This lets you play over a normal dynamic range (soft to loud).

3 (Hard) This is designed for playing very soft passages, giving you slightly more

detailed control in the soft volume range.

Touch and Touch Sensitivity

• To save the Touch on/off status

and the Function parameters to

internal memory (ﬂash memory),

press and hold the [FUNCTION]

button. (See page 78.)

001

GrandPno

Indicates Touch

function is on.

Effects

The PSR-292 is equipped with a wide variety of effects that can be used to enhance the sound

of the voices. The PSR-292 has four separate effect systems — Harmony, Reverb, Chorus and

DSP — and each has many different effect types to choose from.

The Harmony section features a variety of performance effects that enhance the

melodies you play when using the accompaniment styles of the PSR-292. A total

of twenty-six Harmony types are available. (See page 33.)

Tremolo, Trill and Echo effects can be used even if accompaniment is off.

There are ﬁve different Harmony Types that automatically create harmony parts

(for notes played in the upper section of the keyboard) to match the accompani-

ment chords.

Turn on/off the Harmony effect.

Press the [HARMONY] button.

Harmony type and Harmony

Volume (when Harmony Type 1 - 5 is selected) can

be set in the Function mode (page 76).

The Reverb effect reproduces the natural ambient “wash” of sound that occurs

when a instrument is played in a room or concert hall. A total of eight different

Reverb types simulating various different performance environments are avail-

able. (See page 33.)

The following par

ameters can be set in the Function mode (pages 75, 76).

CATEGORY SELECT

Effect Reverb Type

Main Voice Reverb Send Level

Dual Voice Reverb Send Level

Split Voice Reverb Send Level

Harmony

• For the ﬁrst ﬁve Harmony Types

(Duet, Trio, Block, Country, and

Octave), chords must be played

in the Accompaniment area of

the keyboard.

The Harmony voice(s) change in

pitch to best match the chords

you play.

• The speed of the Trill, Tremolo,

and Echo effects depends on the

Tempo setting (page 33).

• Each voice of the PSR-292 has

its own independent Harmony

setting.

001

GrandPno

Indicates Harmony

effect is on.

Reverb

• Twelve additional Reverb Types

are available when controlling the

PSR-292 from a MIDI device.

(For details, See page 92.)

• Each style of the PSR-292 has its

own independent Reverb setting.

Effects

The Chorus effect lets you enhance the sound of the voices with the use of pitch

modulation. Two basic types are provided: Chorus and Flanger. Chorus produces

a thicker, warmer, and more animated sound, whereas Flanger creates a swirling,

metallic effect. A total of four Chorus types are available. (See page 34.)

The following par

ameters can be set in the Function mode (pages 75, 76).

The DSP effect section provides distortion and chorus effects, plus a wealth of

other useful and dynamic effects for enhancing and changing the sound of the

voices. Included among these miscellaneous effects are reverse gate reverb,

phaser, rotary speaker, tremolo, echo, delay, distortion, equalization, and wah. A

total of thirty-eight DSP types are available. (See page 34.)

The following par

ameters can be set in the Function mode (pages 75, 76).

CATEGORY SELECT

Effect Chorus Type

Main Voice Chorus Send Level

Dual Voice Chorus Send Level

Split Voice Chorus Send Level

CATEGORY SELECT

Effect DSP Type

Main Voice DSP Send Level

Dual Voice DSP Send Level

Split Voice DSP Send Level

Chorus

DSP

• Each voice of the PSR-292 has

its own independent DSP setting.

• Fifty-one additional DSP Types

are available when controlling the

PSR-292 from a MIDI device.

(For details, see page 92.)

Effects

■ Effect Types

● Harmony Types

● Reverb Types

No. Harmony Type Display Name Description

1 Duet Duet Harmony types 1 - 5 are pitch-based and add one-, two- or three-

note harmonies to the single-note melody played in the right hand.

These types only sound when chords are played in the auto accom-

paniment area of the keyboard.

2 Trio Trio

3 Block Block

4 Country Country

5 Octave Octave

6 Trill 1/4 note Tril1/4 Types 6 - 26 are rhythm-based effects and add embellishments or

delayed repeats in time with the auto accompaniment. These types

sound whether the auto accompaniment is on or not; however, the

actual speed of the effect depends on the Tempo setting (page 41).

The individual note values in each type let you synchronize the ef-

fect precisely to the rhythm. Triplet settings are also available: 1/6

= quarter-note triplets, 1/12 = eighth-note triplets, 1/24 = sixteenth-

note triplets.

• The Trill effect Types (6 - 12) create two-note trills (alternating

notes) when two notes are held.

• The Tremolo effect Types (13 - 19) repeat all held notes (up to

four).

• The Echo effect Types (20 - 26) create delayed repeats of each

note played.

7 Trill 1/6 note Tril1/6

8 Trill 1/8 note Tril1/8

9 Trill 1/12 note Tril1/12

10 Trill 1/16 note Tril1/16

11 Trill 1/24 note Tril1/24

12 Trill 1/32 note Tril1/32

13 Tremolo 1/4 note Trem1/4

14 Tremolo 1/6 note Trem1/6

15 Tremolo 1/8 note Trem1/8

16 Tremolo 1/12 note Trem1/12

17 Tremolo 1/16 note Trem1/16

18 Tremolo 1/24 note Trem1/24

19 Tremolo 1/32 note Trem1/32

20 Echo 1/4 note Echo1/4

21 Echo 1/6 note Echo1/6

22 Echo 1/8 note Echo1/8

23 Echo 1/12 note Echo1/12

24 Echo 1/16 note Echo1/16

25 Echo 1/24 note Echo1/24

26 Echo 1/32 note Echo1/32

No. Reverb Type Display Name Description

1 Hall 1 Hall1 Concert hall reverb.

2 Hall 2 Hall1

3 Room 1 Room1 Small room reverb.

4 Room 2 Room2

5 Stage 1 Stage1 Reverb for solo instruments.

6 Stage 2 Stage2

7 Plate 1 Plate1 Simulated steel plate reverb.

8 Plate 2 Plate2

9 Off Off No effect.

Effects

● Chorus Types

● DSP Types

No. Chorus Type Display Name Description

1 Chorus 1 Chorus1 Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing.

2 Chorus 2 Chorus2

3 Flanger 1 Flanger1 Pronounced three-phase modulation with a slight metallic sound.

4 Flanger 2 Flanger2

5 Off Off No effect.

No. DSP Type Display Name Description

1 Hall 1 Hall1 Concert hall reverb.

2 Hall 2 Hall2

3 Room 1 Room1 Small room reverb.

4 Room 2 Room2

5 Stage 1 Stage1 Reverb for solo instruments.

6 Stage 2 Stage2

7 Plate 1 Plate1 Simulated steel plate reverb.

8 Plate 2 Plate2

9 Early Reflection 1 ER1 Early reflections only.

10 Early Reflection 2 ER2

11 Gate Reverb Gate1 Gated reverb effect, in which the reverberation is quickly cut off for special ef-

fects.

12 Reverse Gate Gate2 Similar to Gate Reverb, but with a reverse increase in reverb.

13 Chorus 1 Chorus1 Conventional chorus effect with rich, warm chorusing.

14 Chorus 2 Chorus2

15 Flanger 1 Flanger1 Pronounced three-phase modulation with slight metallic sound.

16 Flanger 2 Flanger2

17 Symphonic Symphony Exceptionally rich & deep chorusing.

18 Phaser Phaser Pronounced, metallic modulation with periodic phase change.

19 Rotary Speaker 1 Rotary1 Rotary speaker simulation.

20 Rotary Speaker 2 Rotary2

21 Tremolo 1 Tremolo1 Rich Tremolo effect with both volume and pitch modulation.

22 Tremolo 2 Tremolo2

23 Guitar Tremolo Guitar Tremolo Simulated electric guitar tremolo.

24 Auto Pan AutoPan Several panning effects that automatically shift the sound position (left, right,

front, back).

25 Auto Wah AutoWah Repeating filter sweep “wah” effect.

26 Delay Left - Center -

Right

DelayLCR Three independent delays, for the left, right and center stereo positions.

27 Delay Left - Right DelayLR Initial delay for each stereo channel, and two separate feedback delays.

28 Echo Echo Stereo delay, with independent feedback level settings for each channel.

29 Cross Delay CrossDly Complex effect that sends the delayed repeats “bouncing” between the left

and right channels.

30 Karaoke Karaoke Deep, pronounced echo effect.

31 Distortion Hard D Hard Hard-edged, warm distortion.

32 Distortion Soft D Soft Soft, warm distortion.

33 Overdrive Overdrv Natural distortion, like that of an overdriven amplifier.

34 Amp Simulation AmpSimu Characteristic sound of a guitar amplifier/speaker.

35 EQ Disco EQ Disco Equalizer effect that boosts both high and low frequencies, as is typical in

most disco music.

36 EQ Telephone EQ Tel Equalizer effect that cuts both high and low frequencies, to simulate the sound

heard through a telephone receiver.

37 3Band EQ 3BandEQ Equalizer with three separate frequency bands.

38 2Band EQ 2BandEQ Equalizer with two separate frequency bands.

39 No Effect Off No effect

Selecting and Playing Styles

The PSR-292 provides dynamic rhythm/accompaniment patterns (styles) — as well as voice

settings appropriate for each style — for various popular musical categories.

A total of 135 different styles are available, in several different categories. Each style is made up of separate

“sections” — Intro, Main A and B, and Ending — letting you call up different accompaniment sections as you

perform.

The auto accompaniment features that are built into the rhythms add the excitement of instrumental backing to

your performance, letting you control the accompaniment by the chords you play. Auto accompaniment effec-

tively splits the keyboard into two areas: The upper is used for playing a melody line, and the lower (set by

default to keys F#2 and lower) is for the auto accompaniment function.

The PSR-292 also features the convenient Dictionary function (page 45). Dictionary provides you with a built-

in “chord encyclopedia” that teaches you how to play any chord you specify by showing you the appropriate

notes in the display.

1 Press the [STYLE] button.

2 Select the desired style number.

The categories of each styles and their numbers are shown

on the panel. A complete style list of the available styles is

given on page 86.

■ Use the dial. You can also use the CATEGORY and/or SELECT

buttons.

Turn the dial and select the desired style. Select the appropriate category by

using the CATEGORY [ ]/[ ] buttons. When you come close to the

desired number, use the SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons to step down and up

through the style numbers.

Selecting a Style

Style name and number

001

8BtModrn

Selecting and Playing Styles

■ Use the numeric keypad.

Style numbers can be selected in the same way as with the voices (page 24).

You can use the numeric keypad to directly enter the style number, or use the

[+]/[-] buttons to step up and down through the styles.

The panel buttons below function as style controls.

1 Turn on the auto accompaniment.

Press the [ACMP] button to turn on (enable) the auto accompaniment.

Playing the Styles

Pressing this button alter-

nately enables and can-

cels the Sync Stop

function. (See page 40.)

Pressing this button alter-

nately starts and stops

style playback.

Pressing this button alter-

nately enables and can-

cels the bass and chord

accompaniment. (See

below.)

This controls the Intro

and Ending sections.

(See pages 38, 39.)

Pressing this button alter-

nately enables and can-

cels the Sync Start

function. (See page 37.)

Pressing this button switches

between the Main A and Main B

sections, automatically adding a

ﬁll-in pattern before changing the

section. (See page 42.)

001

8BtModrn

Indicates that auto

accompaniment is on.

Selecting and Playing Styles

2 Start the style.

You can do this in one of the following ways:

■ Pressing the [START/STOP] button

The rhythm starts playing immediately without bass and chord accompani-

ment. The currently selected Main A or B section will play.

You can select the Main A or B section by pressing the appropriate button —

[MAIN A/B] — before pressing the [START/STOP] button. (The display

brieﬂy shows the letter of the selected section: “MAIN A” or “MAIN B.”)

■ Using Tap Tempo to Start

This useful feature lets you tap out the speed (tempo) of the style and auto-

matically start the style at that tapped speed.

Simply tap the [TEMPO/TAP] button four times (or three times for a 3/4

time style), and the style starts automatically at the tempo you tapped. You

can also change the tempo while the style is playing by tapping the

[TEMPO/TAP] button twice at the desired tempo.

■ Using Sync Start

The PSR-292 also has a Sync Start function that allows you to start the style

by simply pressing a key on the keyboard. To use Sync Start, ﬁrst press the

[SYNC START] button (the beat marks all ﬂash to indicate Sync Start stand-

by), then press any key on the keyboard. (When auto accompaniment is on,

play a key or chord in the auto accompaniment area of the keyboard.)

MAIN A

Indicates selected section

(Main A or B).

Auto accompaniment

area

Selecting and Playing Styles

Starting with an Intro section

Each style has its own two- or four-measure Intro section. When used with the auto accompaniment, many of the

Intro sections also include special chord changes and embellishments to enhance your performance.

To start with an Intro section:

1) Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button — to select which section (A or B) is to follow the Intro.

2) Press the [INTRO ENDING] button.

To actually start the Intro section, press the [START/STOP] button.

Using Sync Start with an Intro section

You can also use the Sync Start function with the special Intro section of the selected style.

To use Sync Start with an Intro section:

1) Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button — to select which section (A or B) is to follow the Intro.

2) Press the [INTRO ENDING] button.

3) Press the [SYNC START] button to enable Sync Start, and start the Intro section and accompaniment by play-

ing any key on the keyboard. (When auto accompaniment is on, play a key or chord in the auto accompani-

ment area of the keyboard.)

MAIN A

Indicates selected section

(Main A or B).

INTRO≥A

Indicates Intro standby.

MAIN A

Indicates selected section

(MAIN A or B).

INTRO≥A

Indicates Intro standby.

Auto accompaniment

area

Selecting and Playing Styles

3 Change chords using the auto accompaniment feature.

Try playing a few successive chords with your left hand, and notice how the

bass and chord accompaniment change with each chord you play. (Refer to

page 43 for more information on how to use auto accompaniment.)

4 Stop the style.

You can do this in one of three ways:

■ Pressing the [START/STOP] button

The style stops playing immediately.

■ Using an Ending section

Press the [INTRO ENDING] button. The style stops after the Ending section

is ﬁnished.

■ Pressing the [SYNC START] button

This immediately stops the style and automatically enables Sync Start, let-

ting you restart the style by simply playing a chord or key in the auto accom-

paniment area of the keyboard.

• The [ACMP] button can also be

used to turn off and on the bass/

chord accompaniment while play

ing — allowing you to create

dynamic rhythmic breaks in your

performance.

• Chords played in the auto

accompaniment area of the key-

board are also detected and

played when the style is stopped.

In effect, this gives you a “split

keyboard,” with bass and chords

in the left hand and the normally

selected voice in the right.

• To have the Ending section grad-

ually slow down (ritardando) as it

is playing, press the [INTRO

ENDING] button twice quickly.

END/rit.

ENDING

Selecting and Playing Styles

This convenient feature lets you stop (or pause) the style by releasing your ﬁngers

from the auto accompaniment area of the keyboard. Playing the chord again

restarts the style. This is ideal for putting dynamic breaks in your performance —

for example, stopping the rhythm and accompaniment brieﬂy while you play a

melodic break or solo with your right hand.

1 Press the [ACMP] button.

To turn accompaniment on.

2 Press the [SYNC STOP] button.

Setting Sync Stop to on before starting the style automatically sets Sync

Start to on as well.

3 Play a chord on the keyboard (in the auto accompaniment

area of the keyboard).

The style starts as soon as you play a chord.

4 Stop the style by releasing the chord.

5 To start the style again, play a chord.

6 To turn Sync Stop off, press the [SYNC STOP] button again.

To stop the style completely, press the [START/STOP] button.

Sync Stop

001

8BtModrn

Indicates that auto

accompaniment is on.

001

8BtModrn

Indicates that Sync

Stop is on.

Selecting and Playing Styles

The tempo of style playback can be adjusted over a range of 32 - 280 bpm (beats

per minute).

1 Call up the Tempo setting.

Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button.

2 Change the value.

Use the dial or numeric keypad to set the desired Tempo value, or use the

[+]/[-] buttons to increase or decrease the value.

Changing the Tempo

• When style playback is stopped

and a different style is selected,

the tempo returns to the default

setting of the new style. When

switching styles during playback,

the last tempo setting is main-

tained. (This allows you to keep

the same tempo, even when

changing styles.)

Current Tempo value

120

TEMPO

120

Restoring the Default Tempo

Value

Each song and style has been

given a default or standard Tempo

setting. If you’ve changed the

Tempo, you can instantly restore

the default setting by pressing both

[+]/[-] buttons simultaneously

(when Tempo is selected).

You can also restore the default

Tempo easily by simultaneously

holding the [TEMPO/TAP] button

and moving the dial.

• You can also use the convenient

Tap Tempo function to change

the tempo by “tapping” a new one

in real time. (See page 37.)

Selecting and Playing Styles

While the style is playing, you can add variation in the rhythm/accompaniment by

pressing the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button. This switches between the Main A and

Main B sections, automatically playing a ﬁll-in pattern to smoothly lead into the

next section. For example, if the Main A section is currently playing, pressing this

button automatically plays a ﬁll-in pattern, followed by the Main B section. (See

illustration below.)

You can also select either the Main A or B section to start by pressing the [MAIN/

AUTO FILL] button before starting the style.

The playback volume of the style can be adjusted in the Function mode (pa

ge 76).

This volume control affects only the Style volume. The volume range is 000 -

127.

Accompaniment Sections (Main A/B and Fill-ins)

• Rhythm sounds and ﬁll-in sec-

tions are not available when one

of the Pianist styles (#124 - #135)

are selected.

This appears while the ﬁll-in

pattern is playing.

Fill A≥B

1beat 2 3

1st measure

4 1234123412

2nd measure 3rd measure

...a fill-in pattern

plays immediately

until the end of the

measure...

...and the Main A

or B section

begins here.

If you press the

[MAIN/AUTO

FILL] button

before beat 4...

...a fill-in pattern

plays from here...

...and the Main

A or B section

begins here.

If you press the

[MAIN/AUTO FILL]

button here, after

beat 4...

About the Fill-in Patterns

Adjusting the Style Volume

• Style Volume cannot be changed

unless the Style mode is active.

Selecting and Playing Styles

When it is set to on (page 36), the auto accompaniment function automatically

generates bass and chord accompaniment for you to play along with, by using

Multi Fingering operation. You can change the chords of the accompaniment by

playing keys in the auto accompaniment area of the keyboard using either the

“Single Finger” or “Fingered” method. With Single Finger you can simply play a

one-, two- or three-ﬁnger chord indication (see Single Finger Chords below). The

Fingered technique is that of conventionally playing all the notes of the chord.

Whichever method you use, the PSR-292 “understands” what chord you indicate

and then automatically generates the accompaniment.

■ Single Finger Chords • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Chords that can be produced in Single Finger operation are major, minor, seventh

and minor seventh. The illustration shows how to produce the four chord types.

(The key of C is used here as an example; other keys follow the same rules. For

example, Bb7 is played as Bb and A.)

■ Fingered Chords • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Using the key of C as an example, the chart below shows the types of chords that

can be recognized in the Fingered mode.

Using Auto Accompaniment — Multi Fingering

Cm C

To play a major chord:

Press the root note of

the chord.

To play a minor chord:

Press the root note

together with the nearest

black key to the left of it.

To play a seventh chord:

Press the root note

together with the nearest

white key to the left of it.

To play a minor seventh

chord: Press the root note

together with the nearest

white and black keys to

the left of it (three keys

altogether).

( )

(9)

( )

(9)

Caug

( )

CmM

( )

(9)

CmM

( )

CmM

(9)

( )

Cdim

(9)

( )

(13)

( )

(b9)

( )

(b13)

Csus

1+2+5

( )

(9)

(#11)

( )

(b5)

( )

(#11)

(#9)

( )

C aug

(

11)

( )

CM aug

( )

C sus

( )

● Example for “C” chords

* Notes enclosed in parentheses are optional; the chords will be recognized without them.

Selecting and Playing Styles

Chord Name/[Abbreviation] Normal Voicing Chord (C) Display

Major [M] 1 - 3 - 5 C C

Add ninth [(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - 5 C(9) C(9)

Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6 C6 C6

Sixth ninth [6(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 C6(9) C6(9)

Major seventh [M7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 or

1 - (3) - 5 - 7

CM7 CM7

Major seventh ninth [M7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 CM7(9) CM7(9)

Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7(#11)] 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - 7 or

1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - 7

CM7(#11) CM7(#11)

Flatted ﬁfth [(b5)] 1 - 3 - b5C(b5) Cb5

Major seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [M7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - 7 CM7b5 CM7b5

Suspended fourth [sus4] 1 - 4 - 5 Csus4 Csus4

Augmented [aug] 1 - 3 - #5 Caug Caug

Major seventh augmented [M7aug] 1 - (3) - #5 - 7 CM7aug CM7aug

Minor [m] 1 - b3 - 5 Cm Cm

Minor add ninth [m(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - 5 Cm(9) Cm(9)

Minor sixth [m6] 1 - b3 - 5 - 6 Cm6 Cm6

Minor seventh [m7] 1 - b3 - (5) - b7 Cm7 Cm7

Minor seventh ninth [m7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - b7 Cm7(9) Cm7(9)

Minor seventh add eleventh [m7(11)] 1 - (2) - b3 - 4 - 5 - (b7) Cm7(11) Cm7(11)

Minor major seventh [mM7] 1 - b3 - (5) - 7 CmM7 CmM7

Minor major seventh ninth [mM7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - 7 CmM7(9) CmM7(9)

Minor seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [m7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - b7 Cm7b5 Cm7b5

Minor major seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [mM7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - 7 CmM7b5 CmM7b5

Diminished [dim] 1 - b3 - b5 Cdim Cdim

Diminished seventh [dim7] 1 - b3 - b5 - 6 Cdim7 Cdim7

Seventh [7] 1 - 3 - (5) - b7 or

1 - (3) - 5 - b7

C7 C7

Seventh ﬂatted ninth [7(b9)] 1 - b2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7(b9) C7(b9)

Seventh add ﬂatted thirteenth [7(b13)] 1 - 3 - 5 - b6 - b7 C7(b13) C7(b13)

Seventh ninth [7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7(9) C7(9)

Seventh add sharp eleventh [7(#11)] 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - b7 or

1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - b7

C7(#11) C7(#11)

Seventh add thirteenth [7(13)] 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - b7 C7(13) C7(13)

Seventh sharp ninth [7(#9)] 1 - #2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7(#9) C7(#9)

Seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - b7C7b5C7b5

Seventh augmented [7aug] 1 - 3 - #5 - b7 C7aug C7aug

Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] 1 - 4 - (5) - b7 C7sus4 C7sus4

One plus two plus ﬁve [1+2+5] 1 - 2 - 5 C1+2+5 C

• Notes in parentheses can be

omitted.

• Playing two same root keys in the

adjacent octaves produces

accompaniment based only on

the root.

• A perfect ﬁfth (1 + 5) produces

accompaniment based only on

the root and ﬁfth which can be

used with both major and minor

chords.

• The chord ﬁngerings listed are all

in “root” position, but other inver-

sions can be used — with the fol-

lowing exceptions:

m7, m7

5, 6, m6, sus4, aug,

dim7, 7

5, 6(9), 1+2+5.

• Inversion of the 7sus4 and

m7(11) chords are not recog-

nized if the notes shown in

parentheses are omitted.

• The auto accompaniment will

sometimes not change when

related chords are played in

sequence (e.g. some minor

chords followed by the minor sev

enth).

• Two-note ﬁngerings will produce

a chord based on the previously

played chord.

Selecting and Playing Styles

The Dictionary function is essentially a built-in “chord book” that shows you the

individual notes of chords. It is ideal when you know the name of a certain chord

and want to quickly learn how to play it.

1 Press the [DICTIONARY] button.

2 Specify the root of the chord.

Press the key on the keyboard that corresponds to the desired chord root (as

printed on the panel).

3 Specify the type of the chord (major, minor, seventh, etc.).

Press the key on the keyboard that corresponds to the desired chord type (as

printed on the panel).

Dictionary

Dict.

Pressing this key selects

the root G.

Dict.

Individual notes of chord (keyboard)

Pressing this key selects

the major seventh chord

type (M7).

Notation of chord

Chord name

(root and type)

Dict.

• For a few speciﬁc chords, not all

notes may be shown in the nota-

tion section of the display. This is

due to space limitations in the

display.

• You can also show the inversion

of chord when using [+]/[-] button.

Selecting and Playing Styles

4 Play the chord.

Play the chord (as indicated in the display) in the chord area of the keyboard.

The chord name ﬂashes in the display when the correct notes are held down.

(Inversions for many of the chords are also recognized.)

To leave the Dictionary function, press the [DICTIONARY] button again.

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • What is a Chord? • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

The simple answer: Three or more notes played simultaneously is a chord. (Two notes played

together is an “interval” — an interval being the distance between two different notes. This is also

referred to as a “harmony.”) Depending on the intervals between the three or more notes, a chord

can sound beautiful or muddy and dissonant.

The organization of notes in the example at left — a triad chord — pro-

duces a pleasant, harmonious sound. Triads are made up of three notes

and are the most basic and common chords in most music.

In this triad, the lowest note is the “root.” The root is the most important note in the chord, because

it anchors the sound harmonically by determining its “key” and forms the basis for how we hear the

other notes of the chord.

The second note of this chord is four semitones higher than the ﬁrst, and the third is three semitones

higher than the second. Keeping our root note ﬁxed and changing these notes by a semitone up or

down (sharp or ﬂat), we can create four different chords.

Keep in mind that we can also change the “voicing” of a chord — for example, change the order of

the notes (called “inversions”), or play the same notes in different octaves — without changing the

basic nature of the chord itself.

Dict.

Indicates notes to be

played.

Flashes when correct

notes are held.

Major chord

(ex. C)

Minor chord

(ex. Cm)

Augmented chord

(ex. Caug)

Diminished chord

(ex. Cdim)

Minor 3rd Major 3rd Major 3rd Minor 3rd Major 3rd Major 3rd Minor 3rd Minor 3rd

Inversion examples for the key of C

Selecting and Playing Styles

Beautiful sounding harmonies can be built in this manner. The use of intervals and chords is one of

the most important elements in music. A wide variety of emotions and feelings can be created

depending on the types of chords used and the order in which they are arranged.

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Writing Chord Names • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Knowing how to read and write chord names is an easy yet invaluable skill. Chords are often writ-

ten in a kind of shorthand that makes them instantly recognizable (and gives you the freedom to

play them with the voicing or inversion that you prefer). Once you understand the basic principles

of harmony and chords, it’s very simple to use this shorthand to write out the chords of a song.

First, write the root note of the chord in an uppercase letter. If you need to specify sharp or ﬂat,

indicate that to the right of the root. The chord type should be indicated to the right as well. Exam-

ples for the key of C are shown below.

One important point: Chords are made up of notes “stacked” on top of each other, and the stacked

notes are indicated in the chord name of the chord type as a number — the number being the dis-

tance of the note from the root. (See the keyboard diagram below.) For example, the minor 6th

chord includes the 6th note of the scale, the major 7th chord has the 7th note of the scale, etc.

The Intervals of the Scale

To better understand the intervals and the numbers

used to represent them in the chord name, study this

diagram of the C major scale:

Other Chords

Major chord

Minor chord

Augmented chord

Caug

Diminished chord

Cdim

For simple major chords, the type is omitted.

CDEFGABCDE

Root

2nd

4th

3rd

5th

7th

6th

Octave

11th

9th

Dominant 7th (ﬂatted 7th)

Csus4

5th 4th

Dominant

7th

Major chord

Cm7

Dominant

7th

Minor chord

CM7

7th Major chord

Cm7bb

Dominant

7th

Diminished

chord

Cm6

Minor

chord

6th

C(9)

9th

* Bbb = A

Cdim7

Diminished 7th

(double ﬂatted

7th)

Diminished

chord

Using the Music Database

If you want to play in a certain genre of music but don’t know which style and voice settings

would be appropriate, simply select the desired genre from the Music Database. The PSR-292

automatically makes all appropriate panel settings to let you play in that music style!

1 Press the [M.D.B.] (MUSIC DATABASE) button.

The MUSIC DATABASE menu appears in the display.

2 Select a Music Database.

The categories of each Music Database and their numbers are shown on the

panel. A complete list of the available styles in the Music Database is given

on page 87.

■ Use the dial. You can also use the CATEGORY and/or SELECT

buttons.

Turn the dial and select the Music Database. Select the appropriate category

by using the CATEGORY [ ]/[ ] buttons. When you come close to the

desired number, use the SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons to step down and up

through the Music Database numbers.

■ Use the numeric keypad.

Music Database numbers can be selected in the same way as with the voices

(page 24). You can use the numeric keypad to directly enter the Music Data-

base number, or use the [+]/[-] buttons to step up and down through the

Music Database.

• Press the [M.D.B.] (MUSIC

DATABASE) button to automati-

cally set the Style mode, turn

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT on,

and turn SYNCHRONIZED

START on. See page 37 for

details.

001

AlvFever

208

XmasWalz

Using the Music Database

In this example, we will select #208 “Xmas Walz” and play the Song “Silent

Night”.

3 Play the chords with your left hand and the melody lines

with your right hand along with the music.

As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the style starts.

For information on how to enter chords, see “Multi Fingering” on page 43.

4 When you reach the point in the music indicated by the

arrow above, press the [ENDING] button.

The style plays an ending phrase in ritardando.

When the ending is ﬁnished, the style automatically stops.

You can also stop the style by using the [STOP] button.

Auto accompaniment

area

• See pages 35 through 44 for

details about the Style.

Using the Music Database

Each of the Music Database settings has been specially programmed to match the selected musical

style and each features the best suited voice (or combination of voices), style and other settings.

Pressing the [M.D.B.] (MUSIC DATABASE) button and selecting a number lets you instantly

reconﬁgure all relevant settings, conveniently allowing you to start playing in the desired genre

with all the appropriate sounds — without having to make each setting one by one.

● M.D.B. Parameters

* Accompaniment is automatically set to on.

Synchro Start is automatically set to on (when style is stopped).

Style Style Number Split Voice ON/Off

Accompaniment Split Point Voice Number

MainA/MainB Volume

Style Volume Octave

Main Voice Voice Number Pan

Volume Reverb Send Level

Octave Chorus Send Level

Pan DSP Send Level

Reverb Send Level Split Point

Chorus Send Level Effect Reverb Type

DSP Send Level Chorus Type

Dual Voice ON/Off DSP Type

Voice Number Harmony On/Off

Volume Harmony Type

Octave Harmony Volume

Pan Transpose Transpose

Reverb Send Level Tempo Tempo

Chorus Send Level

DSP Send Level

Data stored by the Music Database

Selecting and Playing Songs

The PSR-292 features a total of 105 songs. These include 100 songs that showcase the rich

and dynamic sounds of the instrument, and 99 of these songs can be used with the educa-

tional Lesson feature (page 61), a powerful tool that makes learning songs fun and easy.

A special Demo song has also been included, and can be played automatically by pressing the

[DEMO] button. Moreover, there are ﬁve special User songs to which you can record your own

performance.

The User songs are “empty” and cannot be played until something has been recorded to them.

(For instructions on recording your own songs, see page 56.)

You can also transfer song data from your computer to the PSR-292 for playback. For details,

see page 71.

1 Press the [SONG] button.

Babbino

012

066

120

● Song Playback Display

These display the notes and name of

the current chord.

Current measure number

Indicates the tracks currently playing back.

(These can be alternately muted and sounded

during playback by pressing the corresponding

SONG MEMORY buttons.)

About the Beat Display

The arrow marks in the beat display ﬂash in time

with the rhythm of the song or style. The ﬁrst

arrow indicates the ﬁrst beat of the measure, and

the others ﬂash in sequence.

First beat of

measure

Second

beat

Third

beat

Fourth

beat

Selecting a Song

001

Just You

Song name and number

Selecting and Playing Songs

2 Select the desired song number.

The categories of each song and their numbers are shown on the panel. A

complete list of the available songs is given on page 15.

■ Use the dial. You can also use the CATEGORY and/or SELECT

buttons.

Turn the dial and select the desired song. Select the appropriate category by

using the CATEGORY [ ]/[ ] buttons. When you come close to the

desired number, use the SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons to step down and up

through the song numbers.

■ Use the numeric keypad.

Song numbers can be selected in the same way as with the voices (page 24).

You can use the numeric keypad to directly enter the song number, or use the

[+]/[-] buttons to step up and down through the song.

Listening to the Flash Memory Song

The PSR-292 can play a song loaded into its internal ﬂash memory. To do this, you’ll need to connect the PSR-292

to a personal computer, and use the “Song Filer” software to transmit the song from the computer.

For more information on Flash songs and Song Filer, refer to page 71.

Select the song number 101-199 using the dial or numeric keypad in the same way as preset songs.

Selecting and Playing Songs

The Panel buttons below function as Song controls.

1 Start the selected song.

Press the [START/STOP] button. As the song plays back, the measure num-

ber and chords are shown in the display.

2 Stop the song.

Press the [START/STOP] button. If playback was started by pressing the

[START/STOP] button, the selected song stops automatically.

Playing the Songs

Turns on the A-B Repeat

function (page 54).

Reverses the playback

position.

Starts and stops

song playback.

Pauses playback. Advances the playback

position.

Indicates track is enabled for playing

Indicates track is muted or

contains no data

About the Song Tracks

Melody tracks Style track

The “A” track contents Style

(accompaniment) data.

Track 2 generally contents

data for the left hand.

Track 1 generally contents

data for the right hand.

● Song track indicators

• You can play along with the song

using the currently selected

voice, or even select a different

voice for playing along. Simply

call up the Voice mode while the

song is playing back and select

the desired voice. (See page 23.)

Selecting and Playing Songs

The convenient A-B Repeat function is an ideal aid for practicing and learning. It

allows you to specify a phrase of a song (between point A and point B) and repeat

it — while you play or practice along with it.

1 While playing a song, set point A (the start point).

During playback, press the [A-B REPEAT] button once, at the beginning

point to be repeated.

2 Set point B (the end point).

As the song continues playing, press the [A-B REPEAT] button once again,

at the ending point to be repeated. The selected phrase repeats indeﬁnitely

until stopped.

3 Pause or stop playback as needed.

Use the [PAUSE] button or [START/STOP] button. Stopping playback does

not cancel the set A/B points or the A-B Repeat function.

4 Turn off the A-B Repeat function.

Press the [A-B REPEAT] button.

A-B Repeat

A-

REPEAT

006

• The A and B points can only be

speciﬁed at the beginning of a

measure (beat 1), and not at any

point in the middle of a measure.

• To set the A point to the begin-

ning of a song, press the [A-B

REPEAT] button before starting

playback.

• If you’re repeat practicing a par-

ticularly difﬁcult section, try slow-

ing down the Tempo to an

appropriate speed to make it eas

ier to play and master the part.

You may also want to slow down

the Tempo while setting the A

and B points; this makes it easier

to accurately set the points.

• You can also set the A-B Repeat

function when the song is

stopped. Simply use the [REW

] and [FF

] buttons to select

the desired measures, pressing

the [A-B REPEAT] button for

each point, then start playback.

A-b

REPEAT

012

Selecting and Playing Songs

The PSR-292 lets you play a melody on the keyboard along with each of the

songs, either with the original melody voice or one of your own selection. The

convenient Melody Voice Change feature takes this one step further — it lets you

replace the original voice used for the melody of the song with the panel voice of

your own selection. For example, if the current voice selected on the panel is

piano but the song’s melody is being played by a ﬂute voice, using Melody Voice

Change will change the ﬂute melody voice to piano.

1 Select the desired song.

Press the [SONG] button, then use the dial , numeric keypad or [+]/[-] but-

tons to select the desired song. (See page 51.)

2 Select the desired voice.

Press the [VOICE] button, then use the dial , numeric keypad or [+]/[-] but-

tons to select the desired voice. (See page 23.)

3 Press and hold down the [VOICE] button for at least one

second.

“MELODY VOICE CHANGE” appears in the display, indicating that the

selected panel voice has replaced the song’s original melody voice.

The playback volume of the song can be adjusted in the Function mode (pa

ge 76).

This volume control affects only the Song volume. The volume range is 000 -

127.

Melody Voice Change

MELODY V

Adjusting the Song Volume

• Song Volume cannot be changed

unless the Song mode is active.

(This function becomes Style Vol

ume when the Style mode is

active.)

Song Recording

The PSR-292 features powerful and easy-to-use song recording features that let you record

your keyboard performances — using up to six independent tracks (including one track for

accompaniment) — for creating your own complete, fully orchestrated compositions. You can

record and save up to ﬁve User songs.

Song recording on the PSR-292 is similar to using a tape recorder; whatever you

play on the keyboard is recorded in real time as you play it. Also, when you

record subsequent parts to other tracks, you can hear the previously recorded parts

as you record new ones.

Data that can be recorded to the normal (melody) tracks:

• Note on/off • Chorus Type*

• Velocity • DSP Type*

• Voice Number • Sustain

• Reverb Type* • Tempo*, Time Signature* (if there is no such data in the Chord track)

Data that can be recorded to the Chord track:

• Style number*

• Chord changes and timing

• Changing sections (Intro, Main A/B, etc.)

• Style Volume*

• Tempo, Time Signature*

Make all desired PSR-292 settings.

Before you actually start recording, you’ll need to make various settings for

the song — such as selecting a style, setting the Tempo, and selecting a

voice. (See pages 35, 41, and 23.)

If desired, also make other settings. Refer to the list above for settings that

can be recorded to a song.

rEC

User 1

001

Song Memory Capacity

• Maximum number of notes :

approximately 10,000 (when only

“melody” tracks are recorded)

• Maximum number of chords :

approximately 5,500 (when only

the chord track is recorded)

Recording a User Song

* These settings can only be recorded once at the beginning of a song; other

settings can be changed in the middle of a song.

• When using a Split Voice for

recording, the voice assigned to

the left of the split point cannot

be recorded.

Using the Metronome

You can use the Metronome instead of a style if desired. This allows you to keep your performance “in time,” even

when recording without style. To do this, press the [METRONOME] button before recording in step #4 below.

After the song is completely recorded, simply play back the song with the Metronome turned off. (See page 20.)

Song Recording

2 Select a User song number for recording.

Use the dial or numeric keypad to select the desired song: 201 - 205. If no

song is manually selected, the PSR-292 automatically selects the ﬁrst avail-

able empty song number.

3 Select a track number for recording.

While holding down the [REC] button, press the appropriate SONG MEM-

ORY button.

■ Recording to the Chord Track

A special Chord track is provided for recording accompaniment data. This is

automatically recorded to the Chord track (track A). Selecting the Chord

track automatically turns on the accompaniment.

■ Recording to a Melody Track (1 - 5)

Five independent Melody tracks are provided for recording your keyboard

performance. Normally, you’ll want to record these after you’ve recorded

the Chord track. You can also record the Chord track and one of the Melody

tracks simultaneously.

202

User 2

rEC

User 2

001

• Keep in mind that all recording

operations “replace” the data.

In other words, if you record to

a track that already has

recorded data, all previous

data in the track will be erased

and replaced by the newly

recorded data.

• If accompaniment has already

been turned on before entering

the Record mode, the Chord

track is automatically selected.

Song Recording

4 Start recording.

When the beat marks and track number start ﬂashing, you can start recording

simply by playing the keyboard (or by pressing the [START/STOP] button).

If you want to rehearse your part before recording, press the [SYNC START]

button to turn Sync Start off. After rehearsing, press [SYNC START] again

to return to the above condition.

■ When recording the Chord track

With Sync Start on, play the ﬁrst chord of the song in the auto accompani-

ment area of the keyboard. The accompaniment starts automatically and you

can continue recording, playing other chords in time with the accompani-

ment.

5 Stop recording.

After you’ve ﬁnished playing the part, press the [START/STOP] or [REC]

button.

6 Record to other tracks as desired.

To do this, simply repeat steps #3 - #5 above. Make sure that when you press

the SONG MEMORY button corresponding to the desired track, the track

number in the display ﬂashes.

7 Listen to your new recording.

To play back the song from the beginning, simply press the [START/STOP]

button again. Playback stops when the [START/STOP] button is pressed

again.

Muting Tracks During Playback

While recording is enabled, you can selectively mute different tracks. This is useful for when you want to clearly

hear certain tracks, and not others, during recording. Muting can also be done “on the ﬂy” during playback. To use

muting, press the corresponding SONG MEMORY button, repeatedly if necessary, until the desired track number

in the display is off.

Each press of a SONG MEMORY button (when playback is stopped) cycles through the following settings:

Track number ﬂashes — Track will record.*

* Cannot be selected during playback.

Track number off — Track is muted.

Track number on — Track will play back.

rEC

User 2

001

Indicates the current

measure

Song Recording

The Song Clear operation completely erases all recorded data on all tracks of a

selected User song. Use this operation only when you’re sure you want to erase a

song and record a new one. To erase an individual track of a song while leaving

the other tracks intact, use the Track Clear operation (page 60).

1 Select the desired song.

Press the [SONG] button, then use the numeric keypad or [+]/[-] buttons to

select the desired song (201 - 205).

2 While holding down the [A] button, press SONG MEMORY

button [1].

All track indications in the display ﬂash, indicating that all tracks are to be

erased.

3 Press the [+/YES] button.

4 At the “Sure?” prompt, press the [+/YES] button, or press

the [-/NO] button to abort.

Pressing the [+/YES] button executes the Song Clear operation.

Pressing the [-/NO] button aborts.

Song Clear

202

User 2

YES

ClrUser2

WRITING!

Song Recording

The Track Clear operation completely erases all recorded data on a selected track

of a selected User song, leaving the other tracks intact. Use this operation only

when you’re sure you want to erase a track and record a new one. To erase the

data of an entire song, use the Song Clear operation (page 59).

1 Select the desired song.

Press the [SONG] button, then use the numeric keypad or [+]/[-] buttons to

select the desired song (201 - 205).

2 Press and hold down the button corresponding to the track

to be erased.

Press and hold down the appropriate SONG MEMORY button ([1] - [5],

[A]) for at least one second.

3 Press the [+/YES] button.

4 At the “Sure?” prompt, press the [+/YES] button, or press

the [-/NO] button to abort.

Pressing the [+/YES] button executes the Track Clear operation.

Pressing the [-/NO] button aborts.

Track Clear

202

User 2

YES

ClrTr1

WRITING!

Song Lesson

The Lesson feature provides an exceptionally fun and easy-to-use way to learn how to read

music and play the keyboard. Lesson lets you practice the left- and right-hand parts of each

song independently, step by step, until you’ve mastered them and are ready to practice with

both hands together. These practices are divided into four Lesson steps, as described below.

Lessons 1 - 3 apply to each hand; press the appropriate button, [L] (left) or [R] (right) to select

the desired part for practice.

Naturally, you can also use Song data you’ve loaded from computer with the Lesson fea-

tures.

■ Lesson 1 — Timing

This lesson step lets you practice just the timing of the notes — any note

can be used, as long as you play in rhythm.

■ Lesson 2 — Waiting

In this lesson step, the PSR-292 waits for you to play the correct notes

before continuing playback of the song.

■ Lesson 3 — Minus One

This lesson step plays back the song with one part muted, letting you play

and master the missing part yourself — in rhythm and at the proper tempo.

■ Lesson 4 — Both Hands

Lesson 4 is a “Minus One” practice essentially the same as Lesson 3,

except that both the left- and right-hand parts are muted — letting you play

and master both hands at the same time.

1 Select one of the Lesson songs.

Press the [SONG] button, then use the dial or numeric keypad or [+]/[-] but-

tons to select the desired song.

The songs are divided into several different categories or music genres.

Using the Lesson Feature

036

FurElise

Song Lesson

2 Select the part you wish to work on (left or right) and the

Lesson step.

If you want to work on the right-hand part, press the [R] button; to work on

the left, press the [L] button. Pressing either button repeatedly cycles

through the available Lesson steps in order: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson

3 → Off → Lesson 1, etc. The selected Lesson step is indicated in the dis-

play.

To select Lesson 4, press both [L] and [R] buttons simultaneously.

3 Start the Lesson.

The Lesson and song playback start automatically (following a lead-in

count) as soon as the Lesson step is selected. When the Lesson is ﬁnished,

your performance “grade” is shown in the display (if the Grade function is

turned on; page 65). After a short pause, the Lesson begins again automati-

cally.

4 Press the [START/STOP] button to stop the Lesson.

The PSR-292 exits from the Lesson feature automatically when the [START/

STOP] button is pressed.

Timing

Waiting

MinusOne

036

FurElise

(Song Lesson off)

Timing

Waiting

MinusOne

036

FurElise

(Song Lesson off)

Lr4

BothHand

****

001

060

Asterisks appear indicating the tim-

ing at which you should play the

notes. The line of asterisks repre-

sents one full measure. Sixteenth

notes are indicated by an alternating

asterisk and sharp sign.

Song Lesson

This function allows you to select the track number of a loaded song from com-

puter (only SMF format 0).

The tr

ack number of the song can be speciﬁed in the Function mode (page 76).

This lesson step lets you practice just the timing of the notes — any note can be

used, as long as you play in rhythm. Pick a note to play. For the left hand, use a

note in the auto accompaniment area or play the appropriate left-hand note; for

the right, play a note above F#2. Simply concentrate on playing each note in time

with the rhythmic accompaniment.

1 Select one of the Lesson songs.

2 Select Lesson 1.

Press the [L] or [R] button (repeatedly, if necessary) until Lesson 1 is indicated

3 Play the appropriate melody or chord with the song.

After the lead-in, the song starts automatically, and the appropriate notes

appear in the display. In Lesson 1, simply play one note repeatedly in time

with the music.

Regarding chords and the use of the left hand, the PSR-292 actually has two

different types of songs: 1) songs with normal left-hand chords, and 2) songs

in which the left hand plays arpeggios or melodic ﬁgures in combination

with the right.

In the case of the ﬁrst type, play the chords with your left hand in the auto

accompaniment area of the keyboard.

Select the Lesson Track

Lesson 1 — Timing

• The melody note does not sound

unless your playing is in time with

the rhythm.

Timing

Auto accompaniment

area

Song Lesson

In this lesson step, the PSR-292 waits for you to play the correct notes before con-

tinuing playback of the song. This lets you practice reading the music at your

own pace. The notes to be played are shown in the display, one after another, as

you play them correctly.

1 Select one of the Lesson songs.

2 Select Lesson 2.

Press the [L] or [R] button (repeatedly, if necessary) until Lesson 2 is indi-

cated.

3 Play the appropriate melody or chord with the song.

After the lead-in, the song starts automatically, and the appropriate notes

appear in the display. In Lesson 2, play the correct notes at your own pace,

until you can master playing them in rhythm.

This lesson step lets you practice one part of the song in rhythm at the proper

tempo. The PSR-292 plays back the song accompaniment with one part muted

(either the left part or the right)— letting you play and master the missing part

yourself. The notes you are to play are shown continuously in the display as the

song plays back.

1 Select one of the Lesson songs.

2 Select Lesson 3.

Press the [L] or [R] button (repeatedly, if necessary) until Lesson 3 is indi-

cated.

Lesson 2 — Waiting

Waiting

Lesson 3 — Minus One

MinusOne

Song Lesson

3 Play the appropriate part with the song.

After the lead-in, the song starts automatically, and the appropriate notes

appear in the display. In Lesson 3, listen carefully to the un-muted part, and

play the muted part yourself.

Lesson 4 is a “Minus One” practice essentially the same as Lesson 3, except that

both the left- and right-hand parts are muted — letting you play and master both

hands at the same time. Go on to this lesson step after you’ve mastered each

hand’s part in the previous three lesson steps. Practice both hands in time with the

rhythm along with the notation in the display.

1 Select one of the Lesson songs.

2 Select Lesson 4.

Press the [L] and [R] buttons simultaneously, so that Lesson 4 is indicated.

3 Play both the left- and right-hand parts with the song.

After the lead-in, the song starts automatically, and the appropriate notes

appear in the display. In Lesson 4, both parts (left and right) are muted, let-

ting you play the entire song by yourself.

The Lesson feature has a built-in evaluation function that monitors your practicing

of the Lesson songs, and just like a real teacher, it tells you how well you did each

exercise. Four grades are assigned, depending on your performance: “OK,”

“Good,” “Very Good,” and “Excellent.”

The e

valuation function can be set to on/off in the Function mode (page 76).

Lesson 4 — Both Hands

Lr4

BothHand

Grade

• Grade is automatically set to on

as the default setting.

MIDI Functions

The PSR-292 is MIDI-compatible, featuring MIDI IN and MIDI OUT terminals and providing a

variety of MIDI-related controls. By using the MIDI functions you can expand your musical

possibilities. This section explains what MIDI is, and what it can do, as well as how you can use

MIDI on your PSR-292.

No doubt you have heard the terms “acoustic instrument” and “digital instru-

ment.” In the world today, these are the two main categories of instruments. Let’s

consider an acoustic piano and a classical guitar as representative acoustic instru-

ments. They are easy to understand. With the piano, you strike a key, and a ham-

mer inside hits some strings and plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a

string and the note sounds. But how does a digital instrument go about playing a

note?

As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic instrument the sampling note

(previously recorded note) stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit)

is played based on information received from the keyboard. So then what is the

information from the keyboard that becomes the basis for note production?

For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note using the grand piano sound on

the PSR-292 keyboard. Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated

note, the electronic instrument puts out information from the keyboard such as

“with what voice,” “with which key,” “about how strong,” “when was it pressed,”

and “when was it released.” Then each piece of information is changed into a

number value and sent to the tone generator. Using these numbers as a basis, the

tone generator plays the stored sampling note.

● Example of Keyboard Information

Voice number (with what voice) 01 (grand piano)

Note number (with which key) 60 (C3)

Note on (when was it pressed) and

note off (when was it released)

Timing expressed numerically (quarter note)

Velocity (about how strong) 20 (strong)

What Is MIDI?

Acoustic guitar note production Digital instrument note production

Pluck a string and the body

resonates the sound.

Based on playing information from the keyboard, a

sampling note stored in the tone generator is played

through the speakers.

Tone Generator

(Electronic circuit)

Sampling

Note

Sampling

Note

Playing the keyboard

GM System Level 1

“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible

music data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufac-

turer. The GM mark is afﬁxed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level

1. The PSR-292 supports GM System Level 1.

MIDI Functions

MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface, which

allows electronic musical instruments to communicate with each other, by send-

ing and receiving compatible Note, Control Change, Program Change and various

other types of MIDI data, or messages.

The PSR-292 can control a MIDI device by transmitting note related data and var-

ious types of controller data. The PSR-292 can be controlled by the incoming

MIDI messages which automatically determine tone generator mode, select MIDI

channels, voices and effects, change parameter values and of course play the

voices speciﬁed for the various parts.

MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: Channel messages and System

messages. Below is an explanation of the various types of MIDI messages which

the PSR-292 can receive/transmit.

● Channel Messages

The PSR-292 is an electronic instrument that can handle 16 channels. This is usu-

ally expressed as “it can play 16 instruments at the same time.” Channel messages

transmit information such as Note ON/OFF, Program Change, for each of the 16

channels.

● System Messages

This is data that is used in common by the entire MIDI system. System messages

include messages like Exclusive Messages that transmit data unique to each

instrument manufacturer and Realtime Messages that control the MIDI device.

The messages transmitted/received by the PSR-292 are shown in the MIDI Imple-

mentation Chart on page 90.

Message Name PSR-292 Operation/Panel Setting

Note ON/OFF Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played. Each

message includes a specific note number which corresponds to the

key which is pressed, plus a velocity value based on how hard the

key is stuck.

Program Change Voice number (along with corresponding bank select MSB/LSB set-

tings, if necessary).

Control Change Messages that are used to change some aspect of the sound (mod-

ulation, volume, pan, etc.).

Message Name PSR-292 Operation/Panel Setting

Exclusive Message Reverb/chorus/DSP settings, etc.

Realtime Messages Start/stop operation

MIDI Terminals

In order to exchange MIDI data between multiple

devices, each device must be connected by a cable.

The MIDI terminals of the PSR-292 are located on the

rear panel.

MIDI IN Receives MIDI data from another MIDI device.

MIDI OUT Transmits the PSR-292’s keyboard information as MIDI data

to another MIDI device.

• Special MIDI cables (sold sepa-

rately) must be used for connect-

ing to MIDI devices. They can be

bought at music stores, etc.

• Never use MIDI cables longer

than about 15 meters. Cables

longer than this can pick up noise

which can cause data errors.

MIDI Functions

By connecting your PSR-292’s MIDI terminals to a personal computer, you can

have access to a wide variety of music software.

●

When using a MIDI interface device installed in the personal

computer, connect the MIDI terminals of the personal com-

puter and the PSR-292.

●

When using a MIDI interface with a Macintosh series com-

puter, connect the RS-422 terminal of the computer (modem

or printer terminal) to the MIDI interface, as shown in the dia-

gram below.

●

When connecting to a computer with a USB interface, use the

Yamaha UX16 USB/MIDI Interface. Connect the UX16 and the com-

puter with a standard USB cable, then make the proper MIDI con-

nections between the PSR-292 and the UX16.

Connecting to a Personal Computer

MIDI INMIDI OUT

MIDI OUTMIDI IN

PSR-292

Computer

(sequencer software)

MIDI IN

RS-422

MIDI OUT

MIDI Interface

PSR-292

Computer

(sequencer software)

• When using a Macintosh series

computer, set the MIDI interface

clock setting in the application

software to match the setting of

the MIDI interface you are using.

For details, refer to the owner’s

manual for the software you are

using.

Viewing the Notation for MIDI

Channel 1

• The PSR-292 has a special func-

tion that lets you view the notes

of the MIDI data (channel 1 only)

on the display.

OUT

PSR-292

MIDI IN

USB

MIDI OUT

UX16

Computer

(sequencer software)

MIDI Functions

This function lets you enable or disable keyboard control over the PSR-292’s

voices in the Function mode (page 76). This would come in handy, for example,

when recording notes to MIDI sequencer. If you are using the sequencer to play

back the voices of the PSR-292, you would want to set this to “off” — in order to

avoid getting “double” notes, both from the keyboard and from the sequencer.

Normally, when playing the PSR-292 by itself, this should be set to “on.”

The most common use for the Initial Setup Send function is in recording a song

on a sequencer that is intended for playback with the PSR-292. Essentially, this

takes a “snapshot” of the PSR-292 settings and sends that data to the sequencer.

By recording this “snapshot” at the start of the song (before any actual perfor-

mance data), you can instantly restore the necessary settings on the PSR-292 in

the Function mode (pa

ge 76). Provided there is a pause in the song, you could

also do this in the middle of a song — for example, completely changing the PSR-

292 settings for the next section of the song.

This determines whether the style and song playback functions are controlled by

the PortaTone’s internal clock (off) or by MIDI clock data from an external

sequencer or computer (on).

This should be set to on when you want to have style or song playback follow the

external device (such as a rhythm machine or a sequencer). The default setting is

off.

These settings can be made in the Function mode (pa

ge 76).

This lets you save important PortaTone data and settings to another device (such

as a sequencer, computer, or MIDI data ﬁler).

These settings can be made in the Function mode (pa

ge 76).

● Bulk Data Receive

Send the Bulk Data from computer or sequencer to the PSR-292.

Local Control

• No sound is output from the

PSR-292 when Local ON/OFF

is set to OFF.

Using Initial Setup Send with a Sequencer

• When the Initial Setup Send

operation is completed, the PSR-

292 automatically returns to the

previous panel condition.

External Clock

• If External Clock is set to ON,

style or song playback will not

start unless external clock are

received.

Bulk Data Send

• Keep in mind that all recorded

Song data and One Touch Set-

ting data operations replace

the data.

MIDI Functions

This determines whether Keyboard performance data of the Portatone is transmit-

ted via MIDI OUT or not.

These settings can be made in the Function mode (pa

ge 76).

This determines whether style data is transmitted via MIDI OUT or not.

These settings can be made in the Function mode (pa

ge 76).

This determines whether Song data is transmitted via MIDI OUT or not.

These settings can be made in the Function mode (pa

ge 76).

Keyboard Out

Style Out

Song Out

• For the Song #001, data is not

transmitted.

MIDI LSB Receive Cancel

Determines whether the LSB data of Bank Select is received or not. Press and hold the lowest key and turn on the

power to change the setting (LSB is ignored).

To restore MIDI LSB Receive Cancel to normal (LSB is recognized), turn on the power again normally.

MIDI Functions

The PSR-292’s internal ﬂash memory enables you to save song data transmitted from a connected per-

sonal computer. You can play or practice Flash songs (saved in ﬂash memory) in the same way as preset

songs.

To transmit song data from a personal computer to the PSR-292, you ﬁrst need to install the “Song

Filer” application to your computer.

■ Installing Song Filer • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

You can download the “Song Filer” application from the following Yamaha PK

CLUB website. Make sure that your computer has an Internet connection.

Yamaha PK CLUB (Portable Keyboard Home Page)

http://www.yamahaPKclub.com/

Loading a Song into PSR-292’s Flash Memory

Song data that can be saved in ﬂash memory:

• The number of songs: max. 99 songs (Song #101–#199)

• Available memory: 352 KB

• Data format: SMF format 0

• Visit the Yamaha PK CLUB web-

site for more information on the

latest version of Song Filer (ver-

sion 2.0.0 or higher) and how to

install it.

System requirements for Song Filer:

[Windows]

OS: Windows 95/98/Me/2000

CPU: Pentium/100MHz or faster

Available Memory: 8MB or more

Free space in Hard Disk: 2MB or more

Display: 800 x 600, 256 colors or more

[Macintosh]

OS: Mac OS 7.5 or upper

CPU: Power PC or upper

Available Memory: 8MB or more

Free space in Hard Disk: 2MB or more

Display: 800 x 600, 256 colors or more

MIDI Functions

■

Song Filer • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

After you install Song Filer and connect the PSR-292 to the computer, you can

use the two functions described below.

●

Transmit Files

You can transmit song ﬁles from your computer to your PSR-292’s Flash

Memory.

●

Manage Files on Flash Memory

You can delete and rename ﬁles in your PSR-292’s Flash Memory from your

computer.

• Refer to page 68 for information

on connecting the PSR-292 to a

computer.

• You cannot use the Song Filer’s

“Receive Files” function with the

PSR-292.

• For more information on using

Song Filer, refer to the PDF man-

ual included in the Song Filer

application.

PSR-292

Computer

Transmit

• Never attempt to turn the

power off while transmitting

song data. Doing so will not

only result in failure to save

the data, but also make the

internal ﬂash memory unsta-

ble. It may also clear all the

data residing in the ﬂash mem

ory when turning the power on

and off.

• Saved data in the instrument

may be lost due to malfunction

or incorrect operation. Retain

important data to your com-

puter or ﬂoppy disk.

abcd.mid

Delete

abcd.mid

efgh.mid

Rename

Selecting a right & left hand guide track

You can select a track in the Function mode (page 76) to guide your right and left hand ﬁngering during the Lesson

(page 63).

This function is available only when you select a ﬂash memory song (SMF format 0).

MIDI Functions

The PC Mode lets you instantly reconﬁgure the MIDI control settings for use with

a computer or MIDI device.

● Default settings

■ To turn the PC mode on or off:

Press the [PC] button and then press the appropriate [+]/[-] button. This switches

between the PC Mode on/off settings.

■ To store the PC mode parameters:

1 Change the PC mode parameters.

Change the desired MIDI parameters in the Function mode.

The following PC Mode parameters can be stored to memory.

LOCAL ON/OFF

EXTERNAL

KEYBOARD

STYLE OUT

SONG OUT

2 Store the parameters to the PC memory.

Press and hold the [PC] button until “WRITING!” appears in the LCD.

PC mode is on PC mode is off

LOCAL ON/OFF ON

EXTERNAL CLOCK OFF

KEYBOARD OUT ON

STYLE OUT OFF ON

SONG OUT OFF

PC Mode

• No sound is output from the

PSR-292 when Local ON/OFF

is set to OFF.

• If External Clock is set to ON,

style or song playback will not

start unless external clock are

received.

WRITING!

Function

The PSR-292 has a variety of settings in the Function parameters.

These give you detailed control over many of the PSR-292’s features.

1 Press the Function button.

2 Select a Function name.

Use the SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons to select a Function name.

3 Input the appropriate value or use the [+]/[-] buttons to set

the selected Function.

You can also use the dial.

Using the Function parameters

OVERALL

• To save the Function parameters

and the Touch on/off status to

internal memory (ﬂash memory),

press and hold the [FUNCTION]

button. (See page 78.)

• Use the CATEGORY [ ]/[ ]

buttons when selecting the cate-

gory steps.

104

M.Volume

Function

● Function parameters

CATEGORY SELECT Display Range/

Settings

Description

Overall Transpose Transpos -12–12 This determines the transposition of the entire PSR-292 sound. *

Tuning Tuning -100–100 This determines the pitch of the entire PSR-292 sound . *

Split Point SplitPnt 000–127 This determines the highest key for the Split voice and sets the Split

“point” — in other words, the key that separates the Split (lower) and Main

(upper) voices. (The Split voice sounds up to and including the Split Point

key.) The default Split Point is 054 (F#2). The Split Point setting and Ac-

companiment Split Point setting are automatically set to the same value.

Touch

Sensitivity

TouchSns 1–3 A setting of “1” results in limited touch response; this setting produces a

relatively narrow dynamic range, no matter how lightly or strongly you

play the keys. “2” lets you play over a normal dynamic range (soft to loud),

while “3” is designed for playing very soft passages, giving you slightly

more detailed control in the soft volume range. When Touch is turned off

(page 30), a constant velocity value of 80 is produced (total velocity range

= 0–127).

Main Voice Volume M.Volume 0–127 This determines the volume of the Main voice, letting you create an opti-

mum mix with the Dual or Split voice.

Octave M.Octave -2–2

(octave)

This determines the octave range for the Main voice. Use this to set the

most suitable range for the Main voice.

Pan M.Pan

0 (full left)–64

(center) –127

(full right)

This determines the pan position of the Main voice in the stereo image. *

Reverb

Send

Level

M.RevLvl 0–127 This determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Re-

verb effect. Higher values result in a louder Reverb effect.

Chorus

Send

Level

M.ChoLvl 0–127 This determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Cho-

rus effect. Higher values result in a louder Chorus effect.

DSP Send

Level

M.DspLvl 0–127 This determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the DSP

effect. Higher values result in a louder DSP effect.

Dual Voice Voice D.Voice 1–605 This select the dual voice.

Volume D.Volume 0–127 This determines the volume of the Dual voice, letting you create an opti-

mum mix with the Main voice.

Octave D.Octave -2–2

(octave)

This determines the octave range for the Dual voice. Use this to create

an octave layer with the Main voice.

Pan D.Pan

0 (full left)–64

(center) –127

(full right)

This determines the pan position of the Dual voice in the stereo image.

For a spacious sounding effect, set this value at or near 0, and set the

Main Voice Pan at the opposite positive value.

Reverb

Send

Level

D.RevLvl 0–127 This determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Re-

verb effect. Higher values result in a louder Reverb effect for the Dual

voice.

Chorus

Send

Level

D.ChoLvl 0–127 This determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Cho-

rus effect. Higher values result in a louder Chorus effect for the Dual

voice.

DSP Send

Level

D.DspLvl 0–127 This determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the DSP

effect. Higher values result in a louder DSP effect for the Dual voice.

Split Voice Voice S.Voice 1–605 This select the split voice.

Volume S.Volume 0–127 This determines the volume of the Split voice, letting you create an opti-

mum mix with the Main voice.

Octave S.Octave -2–2

(octave)

This determines the octave range for the Split voice. Use this to set the

most suitable range for the Split (lower) voice.

Pan S.Pan

0 (full left)–64

(center) –127

(full right)

This determines the pan position of the Split voice in the stereo image.

For a spacious sounding effect, set this value at or near 0, and set the

Main Voice Pan at the opposite positive value.

Reverb

Send

Level

S.RevLvl 0–127 This determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb

effect. Higher values result in a louder Reverb effect for the Split voice.

Chorus

Send

Level

S.ChoLvl 0–127 This determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus

effect. Higher values result in a louder Chorus effect for the Split voice.

DSP Send

Level

S.DspLvl 0–127 This determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the DSP

effect. Higher values result in a louder DSP effect for the Split voice.

* The “*” mark indicates that the setting can be restored to default value by pressing both [+]/[-] buttons simultaneously.

Function

* The “*” mark indicates that the setting can be restored to default value by pressing both [+]/[-] buttons simultaneously.

Effect Reverb

Type

Reverb 1–9 This determines the Reverb type, including “off.”

(See the list on page 33).

Chorus

Type

Chorus

1–5

This determines the Chorus type, including “off.”

(See the list on page 34).

DSP Type DSP 1–39 This determines the DSP type, including “off.”

(See the list on page 34).

Harmony Harmony

Type

HarmType 1–26 This determines the Harmony type.

(See the list on page 33).

Harmony

Volume

HarmVol 0–127 This determines the level of the Harmony effect when Harmony type 1-5

is selected, letting you create the optimum mix with the original melody

note.

MIDI Local On/

Off

Local On/Off This determines the Local on or off.

Press the [+]/[-] buttons to set Local Control to on or off.

External

Clock

ExtClock On/Off This determines the External clock or Internal clock.

Press the [+]/[-] buttons to set External clock or Internal clock.

Bulk Data

Send

BulkSend YES/NO This lets you save important PortaTone data and settings to another de-

vice (such as a sequencer, computer, or MIDI data filer).

Use the [YES/+] button to transmit the data.

Use the [NO/-] button to stop the transmission.

Initial

Setup

Send

InitSend YES/NO This lets you save PortaTone initial data to another device (such as a se-

quencer, computer, or MIDI data filer).

Use the [YES/+] button to transmit the data.

Use the [NO/-] button to stop the transmission.

Keyboard

Out

KbdOut On/Off This determines whether Keyboard performance data of the Portatone is

transmitted or not.

Use the [+]/[-] buttons to change the setting.

Style Out StyleOut On/Off This determines whether style data is transmitted via MIDI OUT or not.

Press the [+]/[-] buttons to set the Style Out to on or off.

Song Out SongOut On/Off This determines whether Song data is transmitted via MIDI OUT or not.

Press the [+]/[-] buttons to set Song Out to on or off. (For song #001, data

is not transmitted.)

Volume Style StyleVol 0–127 This determines the volume of the style, letting you create an optimum

mix with your performance.

Song Song8Vol 0–127 This determines the volume of the Song. *

Metronome Volume Mtr8Vol 0–127 This determines the volume of the Metronome. *

Time

Signature

Time8Sig 0–15 This determines the time signature of the Metronome. *

Lesson Lesson

Track (R)

R-Part 1–16 This determines the track number for your right hand lesson.

This setting is effective only loaded song.

Lesson

Track (L)

L-Part 1–16 This determines the track number for your left hand lesson.

This setting is effective only loaded song.

Utility Grade On/

Off

Grade On/Off This determines whether Grade function is on or off.

Press the [+]/[-] buttons to set Grade to on or off.

Demo and

DJ Cancel

D-Cancel On/Off This determines the Demo and DJ cancel is enabled or not.

Press the [+]/[-] buttons to set Demo and DJ Cancel to on or off.

CATEGORY SELECT Display Range/

Settings

Description

Troubleshooting

Problem Possible Cause and Solution

When the PSR-292 is turned on or off, a popping

sound is temporarily produced.

This is normal and indicates that the PSR-292 is receiving electrical

power.

When using a mobile phone, noise is produced. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the PSR-292 may produce

interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it fur-

ther away from the PSR-292.

There is no sound even when the keyboard is

played or when a song is being played back.

Check that nothing is connected to the PHONES/OUTPUT jack on

the rear panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack,

no sound is output.

Check the Local Control on/off. (See page 69.)

Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard

does not produce any sound.

When using the Dictionary function (page 45), the keys in the right

hand area are used only for entering the chord root and type.

The sound of the voices or rhythms seems unusu-

al or strange.

The battery power is too low. Replace the batteries. (See page 10.)

The auto accompaniment doesn’t turn on, even

when pressing the [ACMP] button.

Make sure the Style mode is active before using the auto accompa-

niment. Press the [STYLE] button to enable style operations.

The style or song does not play back even when

pressing the [START/STOP] button.

Check the External Clock on/off. (See page 69.)

The style does not sound properly. Make sure that the Style Volume (page 42) is set to an appropriate

level.

Make sure that the Split Point (page 27) is set to an appropriate value.

When playing back one of the Pianist styles (#124

- #135), the rhythm cannot be heard.

This is normal. The Pianist styles have no drums or bass — only pi-

ano accompaniment. The accompaniment of the style can only be

heard when accompaniment is set to ON and keys are played in the

auto accompaniment area of the keyboard.

Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound

seems to be cut off.

The PSR-292 is polyphonic up to a maximum of 32 notes. If the Dual

voice or Split voice is being used and a style or song is playing back

at the same time, some notes/sounds may be omitted (or “stolen”)

from the accompaniment or song.

A strange “flanging” or “doubling” sound occurs

when using the PSR-292 with a sequencer. (This

may also sound like a “dual” layered sound of two

voices, even when Dual is turned off.)

When using the style with a sequencer, set MIDI Echo (or the relevant

control) to “off.” (Refer to the owner’s manual of your particular de-

vice and/or software for details.)

The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the

opposite effect. For example, pressing the foot-

switch cuts off the sound and releasing it sustains

the sounds.

The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the foot-

switch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning

on the power.

The sound of the voice changes from note to note. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple recordings (sam-

ples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the ac-

tual sound of the voice may be slightly different from note to note.

Data Backup & Initialization

■ Data Backup • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

The following data can be stored to internal ﬂash memory as data backup.

■ Data Initialization • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

● All Data Initialization

All data can be initialized and restored to the factory preset condition by

turning on the power while holding the highest (rightmost) white key and

highest (rightmost) black key on the keyboard. “All Mem CLr” will appear

brieﬂy on the display.

● Loaded Song Initializaion

You can erase only the loaded song data by turning on the power while hold-

ing the highest (rightmost) black key on the keyboard.

Group Parameter

SONG User Song Data

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

See page 28.

PC PC Memory

FUNCTION Tuning

Split Point

Touch Sensitivity

Style Volume

Song Volume

Metronome Volume

Grade On/Off

Demo & DJ Cancel

Touch Touch On/Off

● About the Internal Flash Memory

The Song, One Touch Setting and PC pa-

rameters are automatically stored when

each saving operation is done.

Function and touch On/Off are stored when

Pressing and Holding the Function button.

• Never attempt to turn the

power off when a “WRITING!”

message is shown in the dis-

play. Doing so can damage the

internal ﬂash memory and

result in loss of data.

• All data listed above, plus

loaded song data, will be

erased and/or changed when

the All Data Initialization proce

dure is carried out.

• Carrying out the data initializa-

tion procedure will usually

restore normal operation if the

PSR-292 freezes or begins to

act erratically for any reason.

CLr

All Mem

Voice List

■ Maximum Polyphony • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

The PSR-292 has 32-note maximum polyphony. This means that it can play a

maximum of up to 32 notes at once, regardless of what functions are used. Auto

Accompaniment uses a number of the available notes, so when Auto Accompani-

ment is used the total number of available notes for playing on the keyboard is

correspondingly reduced. The same applies to the Split Voice and Song functions.

• The Voice List includes MIDI pro-

gram change numbers for each

voice. Use these program

change numbers when playing

the PSR-292 via MIDI from an

external device.

• Some voices may sound continu-

ously or have a long decay after

the notes have been released

while the sustain pedal (foot-

switch) is held.

● Panel Voice List

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

Voice Name

MSB LSB

PIANO

001 0 112 0 Grand Piano

002 0 112 1 Bright Piano

003 0 112 3 Honky-tonk Piano

004 0 112 2 MIDI Grand Piano

005 0 113 2 CP 80

006 0 112 6 Harpsichord

E.PIANO

007 0 114 4 Galaxy EP

008 0 112 4 Funky Electric Piano

009 0 112 5 DX Modern Elec. Piano

010 0 113 5 Hyper Tines

011 0 114 5 Venus Electric Piano

012 0 112 7 Clavi

ORGAN

013 0 112 16 Jazz Organ 1

014 0 113 16 Jazz Organ 2

015 0 112 17 Click Organ

016 0 116 16 Bright Organ

017 0 112 18 Rock Organ

018 0 114 18 Purple Organ

019 0 118 16 16'+2' Organ

020 0 119 16 16'+4' Organ

021 0 114 16 Theater Organ

022 0 112 19 Church Organ

023 0 113 19 Chapel Organ

024 0 112 20 Reed Organ

ACCORDION

025 0 113 21 Traditional Accordion

026 0 112 21 Musette Accordion

027 0 113 23 Bandoneon

028 0 112 22 Harmonica

GUITAR

029 0 112 24 Classical Guitar

030 0 112 25 Folk Guitar

031 0 113 25 12Strings Guitar

032 0 112 26 Jazz Guitar

033 0 113 26 Octave Guitar

034 0 112 27 Clean Guitar

035 0 117 27 60’s Clean Guitar

036 0 112 28 Muted Guitar

037 0 112 29 Overdriven Guitar

038 0 112 30 Distortion Guitar

BASS

039 0 112 32 Acoustic Bass

040 0 112 33 Finger Bass

041 0 112 34 Pick Bass

042 0 112 35 Fretless Bass

043 0 112 36 Slap Bass

044 0 112 38 Synth Bass

045 0 113 38 Hi-Q Bass

046 0 113 39 Dance Bass

STRINGS

047 0 112 48 String Ensemble

048 0 112 49 Chamber Strings

049 0 112 50 Synth Strings

050 0 113 49 Slow Strings

051 0 112 44 Tremolo Strings

052 0 112 45 Pizzicato Strings

053 0 112 55 Orchestra Hit

054 0 112 40 Violin

055 0 112 42 Cello

056 0 112 43 Contrabass

057 0 112 105 Banjo

058 0 112 46 Harp

CHOIR

059 0 112 52 Choir

060 0 113 52 Vocal Ensemble

061 0 112 53 Vox Humana

062 0 112 54 Air Choir

SAXOPHONE

063 0 112 64 Soprano Sax

064 0 112 65 Alto Sax

065 0 112 66 Tenor Sax

066 0 114 66 Breathy Tenor

067 0 112 67 Baritone Sax

068 0 112 68 Oboe

069 0 112 69 English Horn

070 0 112 70 Bassoon

071 0 112 71 Clarinet

TRUMPET

072 0 112 56 Trumpet

073 0 112 59 Muted Trumpet

074 0 112 57 Trombone

075 0 113 57 Trombone Section

076 0 112 60 French Horn

077 0 112 58 Tuba

BRASS

078 0 112 61 Brass Section

079 0 113 61 Big Band Brass

080 0 119 61 Mellow Horns

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

Voice Name

MSB LSB

Voice List

● XG Voice List

081 0 112 62 Synth Brass

082 0 113 62 Jump Brass

083 0 114 62 Techno Brass

FLUTE

084 0 112 73 Flute

085 0 112 72 Piccolo

086 0 112 75 Pan Flute

087 0 112 74 Recorder

088 0 112 79 Ocarina

SYNTH LEAD

089 0 112 80 Square Lead

090 0 112 81 Sawtooth Lead

091 0 112 85 Voice Lead

092 0 112 98 Star Dust

093 0 112 100 Brightness

094 0 115 81 Analogon

095 0 119 81 Fargo

SYNTH PAD

096 0 112 88 Fantasia

097 0 113 100 Bell Pad

098 0 112 91 Xenon Pad

099 0 112 94 Equinox

100 0 113 89 Dark Moon

PERCUSSION

101 0 112 11 Vibraphone

102 0 112 12 Marimba

103 0 112 13 Xylophone

104 0 112 114 Steel Drums

105 0 112 8 Celesta

106 0 112 14 Tubular Bells

107 0 112 47 Timpani

108 0 112 10 Music Box

DRUM KITS

109 127 0 0 Standard Kit 1

110 127 0 1 Standard Kit 2

111 127 0 8 Room Kit

112 127 0 16 Rock Kit

113 127 0 24 Electronic Kit

114 127 0 25 Analog Kit

115 127 0 27 Dance Kit

116 127 0 32 Jazz Kit

117 127 0 40 Brush Kit

118 127 0 48 Symphony Kit

119 126 0 0 SFX Kit 1

120 126 0 1 SFX Kit 2

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

Voice Name

MSB LSB

PIANO

121 0 0 0 Grand Piano

122 0 1 0 Grand Piano KSP

123 0 18 0 Mellow Grand Piano

124 0 40 0 Piano Strings

125 0 41 0 Dream

126 0 0 1 Bright Piano

127 0 1 1 Bright Piano KSP

128 0 0 2 Electric Grand Piano

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

Voice Name

MSB LSB

129 0 1 2 Electric Grand Piano KSP

130 0 32 2 Detuned CP80

131 0 40 2 Layered CP 1

132 0 41 2 Layered CP 2

133 0 0 3 Honky-tonk Piano

134 0 1 3 Honky-tonk Piano KSP

135 0 0 4 Electric Piano 1

136 0 1 4 Electric Piano 1 KSP

137 0 18 4 Mellow Electric Piano 1

138 0 32 4 Chorus Electric Piano 1

139 0 40 4 Hard Electric Piano

1400454

Velocity Crossfade Electric

Piano 1

141 0 64 4 60’s Electric Piano 1

142 0 0 5 Electric Piano 2

143 0 1 5 Electric Piano 2 KSP

144 0 32 5 Chorus Electric Piano 2

145 0 33 5 DX Electric Piano Hard

146 0 34 5 DX Legend

147 0 40 5 DX Phase Electric Piano

148 0 41 5 DX + Analog Electric Piano

149 0 42 5 DX Koto Electric Piano

1500455

Velocity Crossfade Electric

Piano 2

151 0 0 6 Harpsichord

152 0 1 6 Harpsichord KSP

153 0 25 6 Harpsichord 2

154 0 35 6 Harpsichord 3

155 0 0 7 Clavi

156 0 1 7 Clavi KSP

157 0 27 7 Clavi Wah

158 0 64 7 Pulse Clavi

159 0 65 7 Pierce Clavi

CHROMATIC

160 0 0 8 Celesta

161 0 0 9 Glockenspiel

162 0 0 10 Music Box

163 0 64 10 Orgel

164 0 0 11 Vibraphone

165 0 1 11 Vibraphone KSP

166 0 45 11 Hard Vibraphone

167 0 0 12 Marimba

168 0 1 12 Marimba KSP

169 0 64 12 Sine Marimba

170 0 97 12 Balimba

171 0 98 12 Log Drums

172 0 0 13 Xylophone

173 0 0 14 Tubular Bells

174 0 96 14 Church Bells

175 0 97 14 Carillon

176 0 0 15 Dulcimer

177 0 35 15 Dulcimer 2

178 0 96 15 Cimbalom

179 0 97 15 Santur

ORGAN

180 0 0 16 DrawOrg

181 0 32 16 DetDrawOrg

182 0 33 16 60sDrawOrg1

183 0 34 16 60sDrawOrg2

184 0 35 16 70sDrawOrg1

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

Voice Name

MSB LSB

Voice List

185 0 36 16 DrawOrg2

186 0 37 16 60sDrawOrg3

187 0 38 16 Even Bar

188 0 40 16 16+2"2/3

189 0 64 16 Organ Bass

190 0 65 16 70sDrawOrg2

191 0 66 16 Cheezy Organ

192 0 67 16 DrawOrg3

193 0 0 17 Percussive Organ

194 0 24 17 70’s Percussive Organ

195 0 32 17 Detuned Percussive Organ

196 0 33 17 Light Organ

197 0 37 17 Percussive Organ 2

198 0 0 18 Rock Organ

199 0 64 18 Rotary Organ

200 0 65 18 Slow Rotary

201 0 66 18 Fast Rotary

202 0 0 19 Church Organ

203 0 32 19 Church Organ 3

204 0 35 19 Church Organ 2

205 0 40 19 Notre Dame

206 0 64 19 Organ Flute

207 0 65 19 Tremolo Organ Flute

208 0 0 20 Reed Organ

209 0 40 20 Puff Organ

210 0 0 21 Accordion

211 0 32 21 Accord It

212 0 0 22 Hamonica

213 0 32 22 Harmonica 2

214 0 0 23 Tango Accordion

215 0 64 23 Tango Accordion 2

GUITAR

216 0 0 24 Nylon Guitar

217 0 16 24 Nylon Guitar 2

218 0 25 24 Nylon Guitar 3

219 0 43 24 Velocity Guitar Harmonics

220 0 96 24 Ukulele

221 0 0 25 Steel Guitar

222 0 16 25 Steel Guitar 2

223 0 35 25 12-string Guitar

224 0 40 25 Nylon & Steel Guitar

225 0 41 25

Steel Guitar with Body

Sound

226 0 96 25 Mandolin

227 0 0 26 Jazz Guitar

228 0 18 26 Mellow Guitar

229 0 32 26 Jazz Amp

230 0 0 27 Clean Guitar

231 0 32 27 Chorus Guitar

232 0 0 28 Muted Guitar

233 0 40 28 Funk Guitar 1

234 0 41 28 Muted Steel Guitar

235 0 43 28 Funk Guitar 2

236 0 45 28 Jazz Man

237 0 0 29 Overdriven Guitar

238 0 43 29 Guitar Pinch

239 0 0 30 Distortion Guitar

240 0 40 30 Feedback Guitar

241 0 41 30 Feedback Guitar 2

242 0 0 31 Guitar Harmonics

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

Voice Name

MSB LSB

243 0 65 31 Guitar Feedback

244 0 66 31 Guitar Harmonics 2

BASS

245 0 0 32 Acoustic Bass

246 0 40 32 Jazz Rhythm

247 0 45 32

Velocity Crossfade Upright

Bass

248 0 0 33 Finger Bass

249 0 18 33 Finger Dark

250 0 27 33 Flange Bass

251 0 40 33

Bass & Distorted Electric

Guitar

252 0 43 33 Finger Slap Bass

253 0 45 33 Finger Bass 2

254 0 65 33 Modulated Bass

255 0 0 34 Pick Bass

256 0 28 34 Muted Pick Bass

257 0 0 35 Fretless Bass

258 0 32 35 Fretless Bass 2

259 0 33 35 Fretless Bass 3

260 0 34 35 Fretless Bass 4

261 0 96 35 Synth Fretless

262 0 97 35 Smooth Fretless

263 0 0 36 Slap Bass 1

264 0 27 36 Resonant Slap

265 0 32 36 Punch Thumb Bass

266 0 0 37 Slap Bass 2

267 0 43 37 Velocity Switch Slap

268 0 0 38 Synth Bass 1

269 0 18 38 Synth Bass 1 Dark

270 0 20 38 Fast Resonant Bass

271 0 24 38 Acid Bass

272 0 35 38 Clavi Bass

273 0 40 38 Techno Synth Bass

274 0 64 38 Orbiter

275 0 65 38 Square Bass

276 0 66 38 Rubber Bass

277 0 96 38 Hammer

278 0 0 39 Synth Bass 2

279 0 6 39 Mellow Synth Bass

280 0 12 39 Sequenced Bass

281 0 18 39 Click Synth Bass

282 0 19 39 Synth Bass 2 Dark

283 0 32 39 Smooth Synth Bass

284 0 40 39 Modular Synth Bass

285 0 41 39 DX Bass

286 0 64 39 X Wire Bass

STRING

287 0 0 40 Violin

288 0 8 40 Slow Violin

289 0 0 41 Viola

290 0 0 42 Cello

291 0 0 43 Contrabass

292 0 0 44 Tremolo Strings

293 0 8 44 Slow Tremolo Strings

294 0 40 44 Suspense Strings

295 0 0 45 Pizzicato Strings

296 0 0 46 Orchestral Harp

297 0 40 46 Yang Chin

298 0 0 47 Timpani

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

Voice Name

MSB LSB

Voice List

ENSEMBLE

299 0 0 48 Strings 1

300 0 3 48 Stereo Strings

301 0 8 48 Slow Strings

302 0 24 48 Arco Strings

303 0 35 48 60’s Strings

304 0 40 48 Orchestra

305 0 41 48 Orchestra 2

306 0 42 48 Tremolo Orchestra

307 0 45 48 Velocity Strings

308 0 0 49 Strings 2

309 0 3 49 Stereo Slow Strings

310 0 8 49 Legato Strings

311 0 40 49 Warm Strings

312 0 41 49 Kingdom

313 0 64 49 70’s Strings

314 0 65 49 String Ensemble 3

315 0 0 50 Synth Strings 1

316 0 27 50 Resonant Strings

317 0 64 50 Synth Strings 4

318 0 65 50 Synth Strings 5

319 0 0 51 Synth Strings 2

320 0 0 52 Choir Aahs

321 0 3 52 Stereo Choir

322 0 16 52 Choir Aahs 2

323 0 32 52 Mellow Choir

324 0 40 52 Choir Strings

325 0 0 53 Voice Oohs

326 0 0 54 Synth Voice

327 0 40 54 Synth Voice 2

328 0 41 54 Choral

329 0 64 54 Analog Voice

330 0 0 55 Orchestra Hit

331 0 35 55 Orchestra Hit 2

332 0 64 55 Impact

BRASS

333 0 0 56 Trumpet

334 0 16 56 Trumpet 2

335 0 17 56 Bright Trumpet

336 0 32 56 Warm Trumpet

337 0 0 57 Trombone

338 0 18 57 Trombone 2

339 0 0 58 Tuba

340 0 16 58 Tuba 2

341 0 0 59 Muted Trumpet

342 0 0 60 French Horn

343 0 6 60 French Horn Solo

344 0 32 60 French Horn 2

345 0 37 60 Horn Orchestra

346 0 0 61 Brass Section

347 0 35 61

Trumpet & Trombone

Section

348 0 40 61 Brass Section 2

349 0 41 61 High Brass

350 0 42 61 Mellow Brass

351 0 0 62 Synth Brass 1

352 0 12 62 Quack Brass

353 0 20 62 Resonant Synth Brass

354 0 24 62 Poly Brass

355 0 27 62 Synth Brass 3

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

Voice Name

MSB LSB

356 0 32 62 Jump Brass

357 0 45 62 Analog Velocity Brass 1

358 0 64 62 Analog Brass 1

359 0 0 63 Synth Brass 2

360 0 18 63 Soft Brass

361 0 40 63 Synth Brass 4

362 0 41 63 Choir Brass

363 0 45 63 Analog Velocity Brass 2

364 0 64 63 Analog Brass 2

REED

365 0 0 64 Soprano Sax

366 0 0 65 Alto Sax

367 0 40 65 Sax Section

368 0 43 65 Hyper Alto Sax

369 0 0 66 Tenor Sax

370 0 40 66 Breathy Tenor Sax

371 0 41 66 Soft Tenor Sax

372 0 64 66 Tenor Sax 2

373 0 0 67 Baritone Sax

374 0 0 68 Oboe

375 0 0 69 English Horn

376 0 0 70 Bassoon

377 0 0 71 Clarinet

PIPE

378 0 0 72 Piccolo

379 0 0 73 Flute

380 0 0 74 Recorder

381 0 0 75 Pan Flute

382 0 0 76 Blown Bottle

383 0 0 77 Shakuhachi

384 0 0 78 Whistle

385 0 0 79 Ocarina

SYNTH LEAD

386 0 0 80 Square Lead

387 0 6 80 Square Lead 2

388 0 8 80 LM Square

389 0 18 80 Hollow

390 0 19 80 Shroud

391 0 64 80 Mellow

392 0 65 80 Solo Sine

393 0 66 80 Sine Lead

394 0 0 81 Sawtooth Lead

395 0 6 81 Sawtooth Lead 2

396 0 8 81 Thick Sawtooth

397 0 18 81 Dynamic Sawtooth

398 0 19 81 Digital Sawtooth

399 0 20 81 Big Lead

400 0 24 81 Heavy Synth

401 0 25 81 Waspy Synth

402 0 40 81 Pulse Sawtooth

403 0 41 81 Dr. Lead

404 0 45 81 Velocity Lead

405 0 96 81 Sequenced Analog

406 0 0 82 Calliope Lead

407 0 65 82 Pure Pad

408 0 0 83 Chiff Lead

409 0 64 83 Rubby

410 0 0 84 Charang Lead

411 0 64 84 Distorted Lead

412 0 65 84 Wire Lead

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

Voice Name

MSB LSB

Voice List

413 0 0 85 Voice Lead

414 0 24 85 Synth Aahs

415 0 64 85 Vox Lead

416 0 0 86 Fifths Lead

417 0 35 86 Big Five

418 0 0 87 Bass & Lead

419 0 16 87 Big & Low

420 0 64 87 Fat & Perky

421 0 65 87 Soft Whirl

SYNTH PAD

422 0 0 88 New Age Pad

423 0 64 88 Fantasy

424 0 0 89 Warm Pad

425 0 16 89 Thick Pad

426 0 17 89 Soft Pad

427 0 18 89 Sine Pad

428 0 64 89 Horn Pad

429 0 65 89 Rotary Strings

430 0 0 90 Poly Synth Pad

431 0 64 90 Poly Pad 80

432 0 65 90 Click Pad

433 0 66 90 Analog Pad

434 0 67 90 Square Pad

435 0 0 91 Choir Pad

436 0 64 91 Heaven

437 0 66 91 Itopia

438 0 67 91 CC Pad

439 0 0 92 Bowed Pad

440 0 64 92 Glacier

441 0 65 92 Glass Pad

442 0 0 93 Metallic Pad

443 0 64 93 Tine Pad

444 0 65 93 Pan Pad

445 0 0 94 Halo Pad

446 0 0 95 Sweep Pad

447 0 20 95 Shwimmer

448 0 27 95 Converge

449 0 64 95 Polar Pad

450 0 66 95 Celestial

SYNTH EFFECTS

451 0 0 96 Rain

452 0 45 96 Clavi Pad

453 0 64 96 Harmo Rain

454 0 65 96 African Wind

455 0 66 96 Carib

456 0 0 97 Sound Track

457 0 27 97 Prologue

458 0 64 97 Ancestral

459 0 0 98 Crystal

460 0 12 98 Synth Drum Comp

461 0 14 98 Popcorn

462 0 18 98 Tiny Bells

463 0 35 98 Round Glockenspiel

464 0 40 98 Glockenspiel Chimes

465 0 41 98 Clear Bells

466 0 42 98 Chorus Bells

467 0 64 98 Synth Mallet

468 0 65 98 Soft Crystal

469 0 66 98 Loud Glockenspiel

470 0 67 98 Christmas Bells

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

Voice Name

MSB LSB

471 0 68 98 Vibraphone Bells

472 0 69 98 Digital Bells

473 0 70 98 Air Bells

474 0 71 98 Bell Harp

475 0 72 98 Gamelimba

476 0 0 99 Atmosphere

477 0 18 99 Warm Atmosphere

478 0 19 99 Hollow Release

479 0 40 99 Nylon Electric Piano

480 0 64 99 Nylon Harp

481 0 65 99 Harp Vox

482 0 66 99 Atmosphere Pad

483 0 67 99 Planet

484 0 0 100 Brightness

485 0 64 100 Fantasy Bells

486 0 96 100 Smokey

487 0 0 101 Goblins

488 0 64 101 Goblins Synth

489 0 65 101 Creeper

490 0 66 101 Ring Pad

491 0 67 101 Ritual

492 0 68 101 To Heaven

493 0 70 101 Night

494 0 71 101 Glisten

495 0 96 101 Bell Choir

496 0 0 102 Echoes

497 0 8 102 Echoes 2

498 0 14 102 Echo Pan

499 0 64 102 Echo Bells

500 0 65 102 Big Pan

501 0 66 102 Synth Piano

502 0 67 102 Creation

503 0 68 102 Star Dust

504 0 69 102 Resonant & Panning

505 0 0 103 Sci-Fi

506 0 64 103 Starz

WORLD

507 0 0 104 Sitar

508 0 32 104 Detuned Sitar

509 0 35 104 Sitar 2

510 0 96 104 Tambra

511 0 97 104 Tamboura

512 0 0 105 Banjo

513 0 28 105 Muted Banjo

514 0 96 105 Rabab

515 0 97 105 Gopichant

516 0 98 105 Oud

517 0 0 106 Shamisen

518 0 0 107 Koto

519 0 96 107 Taisho-kin

520 0 97 107 Kanoon

521 0 0 108 Kalimba

522 0 0 109 Bagpipe

523 0 0 110 Fiddle

524 0 0 111 Shanai

525 0 64 111 Shanai 2

526 0 96 111 Pungi

527 0 97 111 Hichiriki

PERCUSSIVE

528 0 0 112 Tinkle Bell

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

Voice Name

MSB LSB

Voice List

● DJ Voice List

529 0 96 112 Bonang

530 0 97 112 Altair

531 0 98 112 Gamelan Gongs

532 0 99 112 Stereo Gamelan Gongs

533 0 100 112 Rama Cymbal

534 0 101 112 Asian Bells

535 0 0 113 Agogo

536 0 0 114 Steel Drums

537 0 97 114 Glass Percussion

538 0 98 114 Thai Bells

539 0 0 115 Woodblock

540 0 96 115 Castanets

541 0 0 116 Taiko Drum

542 0 96 116 Gran Cassa

543 0 0 117 Melodic Tom

544 0 64 117 Melodic Tom 2

545 0 65 117 Real Tom

546 0 66 117 Rock Tom

547 0 0 118 Synth Drum

548 0 64 118 Analog Tom

549 0 65 118 Electronic Percussion

550 0 0 119 Reverse Cymbal

SOUND EFFECTS

551 0 0 120 Fret Noise

552 0 0 121 Breath Noise

553 0 0 122 Seashore

554 0 0 123 Bird Tweet

555 0 0 124 Telephone Ring

556 0 0 125 Helicopter

557 0 0 126 Applause

558 0 0 127 Gunshot

559 64 0 0 Cutting Noise

560 64 0 1 Cutting Noise 2

561 64 0 3 String Slap

562 64 0 16 Flute Key Click

563 64 0 32 Shower

564 64 0 33 Thunder

565 64 0 34 Wind

566 64 0 35 Stream

567 64 0 36 Bubble

568 64 0 37 Feed

569 64 0 48 Dog

570 64 0 49 Horse

571 64 0 50 Bird Tweet 2

572 64 0 54 Ghost

573 64 0 55 Maou

574 64 0 64 Phone Call

575 64 0 65 Door Squeak

576 64 0 66 Door Slam

577 64 0 67 Scratch Cut

578 64 0 68 Scratch Split

579 64 0 69 Wind Chime

580 64 0 70 Telephone Ring 2

581 64 0 80 Car Engine Ignition

582 64 0 81 Car Tires Squeal

583 64 0 82 Car Passing

584 64 0 83 Car Crash

585 64 0 84 Siren

586 64 0 85 Train

587 64 0 86 Jet Plane

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

Voice Name

MSB LSB

588 64 0 87 Starship

589 64 0 88 Burst

590 64 0 89 Roller Coaster

591 64 0 90 Submarine

592 64 0 96 Laugh

593 64 0 97 Scream

594 64 0 98 Punch

595 64 0 99 Heartbeat

596 64 0 100 Footsteps

597 64 0 112 Machine Gun

598 64 0 113 Laser Gun

599 64 0 114 Explosion

600 64 0 115 Firework

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

Voice Name

MSB LSB

601 0 123 118 DJ Set 1

602 0 123 119 DJ Set 2

603 0 123 120 DJ Set 3

604 0 123 121 DJ Set 4

605 0 123 122 DJ Set 5

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

Voice Name

MSB LSB

Voice List

● DJ Voice List

Voice No. 601 602 603 604 605

MSB/LSB/PC 000/123/118 000/123/119 000/123/120 000/123/121 000/123/122

No. Note DJ Set 1 DJ Set 2 DJ Set 3 DJ Set 4 DJ Set 5

036 C 1 BD Analog H Bass Drum Soft BD Analog H BD Analog H BD Analog H

037 C# 1 Analog Side Stick Side Stick Analog Side Stick Analog Side Stick Analog Side Stick

038 D 1 Analog Snare 1 Snare M Analog Snare 1 Analog Snare 1 Analog Snare 1

039 D# 1 Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap

040 E 1 Analog Snare 2 Snare H Hard Analog Snare 2 Analog Snare 2 Analog Snare 2

041 F 1 Analog Tom 1 Floor Tom L Analog Tom 1 Analog Tom 1 Analog Tom 1

042 F# 1 Analog HH Closed 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog HH Closed 1 Analog HH Closed 1 Analog HH Closed 1

043 G 1 Analog Tom 2 Floor Tom H Analog Tom 2 Analog Tom 2 Analog Tom 2

044 G# 1 Analog HH Closed 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Analog HH Closed 2 Analog HH Closed 2 Analog HH Closed 2

045 A 1 Analog Tom 3 Low Tom Analog Tom 3 Analog Tom 3 Analog Tom 3

046 A# 1 Analog HH Open Hi-Hat Open Analog HH Open Analog HH Open Analog HH Open

047 B 1 Analog Tom 4 Mid Tom L Analog Tom 4 Analog Tom 4 Analog Tom 4

048 C 2 Analog Tom 5 Mid Tom H Analog Tom 5 Analog Tom 5 Analog Tom 5

049 C# 2 Analog Cymbal Crash Cymbal 1 Analog Cymbal Analog Cymbal Analog Cymbal

050 D 2 Analog Tom 6 High Tom Analog Tom 6 Analog Tom 6 Analog Tom 6

051 D# 2 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1

052 E 2 Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal

053 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup

054 F# 2 Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine

055 G 2

Ohh2 FX01 ORCH signal Go

056 G# 2

057 A 2

058 A# 2

059 B 2

060 C 3

061 C# 3

062 D 3

063 D# 3

064 E 3

065 F 3

066 F# 3

067 G 3

068 G# 3

069 A 3

070 A# 3

071 B 3

072 C 4

FX02 Onemoretime Onemoretime Uhh-Hit Huea

073 C# 4

074 D 4

075 D# 4

076 E 4

077 F 4

078 F# 4

079 G 4

080 G# 4

081 A 4

082 A# 4

083 B 4

084 C 5 Joo Go GetUp Huihu GetUp

085 C# 5 Reverse Ohh2 signal Joo Reverse

086 D 5 Huihu Heau Joo ComeOn Joo

087 D# 5 FXTBrs FX02 FXTBrs Onemoretime FX01

088 E 5 Huea Huihu Go Go Ohh1

089 F 5 GetUp GetUp Huihu GetUp Ohh2

090 F# 5 Ohh1 Reverse FX01 Huea Onemoretime

091 G 5 Go signal ComeOn Ohh2 ComeOn

092 G# 5 Scratch 1 Scratch 1 Scratch 1 Scratch 1 Scratch 1

093 A 5 Scratch 2 Scratch 2 Scratch 2 Scratch 2 Scratch 2

094 A# 5 Scratch 3 Scratch 3 Scratch 3 Scratch 3 Scratch 3

095 B 5 Scratch 4 Scratch 4 Scratch 4 Scratch 4 Scratch 4

096 C 6 Scratch 5 Scratch 5 Scratch 5 Scratch 5 Scratch 5

Style List

Style No. Style Name

8Beat

001 8BeatModern

002 60’sGtrPop

003 8BeatAdria

004 60’s8Beat

005 8Beat

006 OffBeat

007 60’sRock

008 HardRock

009 RockShuffle

010 8BeatRock

16Beat

011 16Beat

012 PopShuffle1

013 PopShuffle2

014 GuitarPop

015 16BtUptempo

016 KoolShuffle

017 JazzRock

018 HipHopLight

Ballad

019 PianoBallad

020 LoveSong

021 6/8ModernEP

022 6/8SlowRock

023 OrganBallad

024 PopBallad

025 16BeatBallad1

026 16BeatBallad2

Dance

027 EuroTrance

028 Ibiza

029 HouseMusik

030 SwingHouse

031 TechnoPolis

032 Clubdance

033 ClubLatin

034 Garage1

035 Garage2

036 TechnoParty

037 UKPop

038 HipHopGroove

039 HipShuffle

040 HipHopPop

Disco

041 70’sDisco1

042 70’sDisco2

043 LatinDisco

044 DiscoPhilly

045 SaturdayNight

046 DiscoChocolate

047 DiscoHands

Swing&Jazz

048 BigBandFast

049 BigBandMid

050 BigBandBallad

051 BigBandShfl

052 JazzClub

053 Swing1

054 Swing2

055 Five/Four

056 JazzBallad

057 Dixieland

058 Ragtime

059 AfroCuban

060 Charleston

R&B

061 Soul

062 DetroitPop1

063 60’sRock&Roll

064 6/8Soul

065 CrocoTwist

066 Rock&Roll

067 DetroitPop2

068 BoogieWoogie

069 ComboBoogie

070 6/8Blues

Country

071 Country8Beat

072 CountryPop

073 CountrySwing

074 Country2/4

075 CowboyBoogie

076 CountryShuffle

077 Bluegrass

Latin

078 BrazilianSamba

079 BossaNova

080 PopBossa

081 Tijuana

082 DiscoLatin

083 Mambo

084 Salsa

085 Beguine

086 GypsyRumba

087 RmbFlamenca

088 RumbaIsland

089 Reggae

Ballroom

090 VienneseWaltz

091 EnglishWaltz

092 Slowfox

093 Foxtrot

094 Quickstep

Style No. Style Name

095 Tango

096 Pasodoble

097 Samba

098 ChaChaCha

099 Rumba

100 Jive

Traditional

101 USMarch

102 6/8March

103 GermanMarch

104 PolkaPop

105 OberPolka

106 Tarantella

107 Showtune

108 ChristmasSwing

109 ChristmasWaltz

110 ScottishReel

111 Hawaiian

Waltz

112 GuitarSerenade

113 SwingWaltz

114 JazzWaltz1

115 JazzWaltz2

116 CountryWaltz

117 OberWalzer

118 Musette

119 DJ-HipHop

120 DJ-DanceSwing

121 DJ-House

122 DJ-GarageHouse

123 DJ-PopR&B

Pianist

124 Stride

125 PianoSwing

126 PianoRag

127 Arpeggio

128 Musical

129 Habanera

130 SlowRock

131 8BeatPianoBallad

132 PianoMarch

133 6/8PianoMarch

134 PianoWaltz

135 PianoBeguine

Style No. Style Name

Music Database List

M.D.B. No. M.D.B. Name

POP HITS

001 AlvFever

002 Croco Rk

003 DayPdise

004 EasySday

005 GoMyWay

006 HowDeep!

007 HurryLuv

008 I’m Torn

009 Imagine

010 ISurvive

011 JustCall

012 JustWay

013 NikitTrp

014 ProudGtr

015 SailngSx

016 Sept.Pop

017 SultanSw

018 SweetLrd

019 ThnkMsic

020 TitanicH

021 WatchGrl

022 WhatALoo

023 WhitePle

024 YestDGtr

SWING & JAZZ

025 Alex Rag

026 Blue Set

027 DayOfW&R

028 HighMoon

029 MistySax

030 MoonLit

031 New York

032 PanthrSw

033 PatrolBr

034 PatrolSx

035 PetiteCl

036 RedRoses

037 SaintMch

038 SatinWd

039 SaxMood

040 SF Heart

041 ShearJz

042 Showbiz

043 SplnkyTb

044 SunnySde

045 TstHoney

046 TwoFoot5

047 WhatsNew

048 Wild Cat

049 WondrLnd

EASY LISTENING

050 BlackFst

051 CaliBlue

052 CiaoCpri

053 Close2U

054 DAmorStr

055 DolanesM

056 ElCondor

057 Entrtain

058 Frippers

059 LuckySax

060 LuvStory

061 MyPrince

062 OSoleMio

063 PalomaGt

064 PuppetBr

065 Raindrop

066 RedMouln

067 R’ticGtr

068 Schiwago

069 ShadowGt

070 SingRain

071 SmallWld

072 SpkSoft

073 SpnishEy

074 StrangeN

075 TieRibbn

076 TimeGoes

077 WhteXmas

078 WishStar

079 WondrWld

ROMANTIC BALLADS

080 AdelineB

081 ArgenCry

082 BeautBdy

083 Bl Bayou

084 CatMemry

085 CavaSolo

086 E Weiss

087 ElvGhett

088 Feeling

089 Fly Away

090 Fnl Date

091 GreenSlv

092 GtCncert

093 HrdToSay

094 LonlyPan

095 MBoxDnce

096 Mn Rivr

097 Norw.Flt

098 OnMyMnd

099 OverRbow

100 Red Lady

101 ReleseMe

102 SavingLv

103 Shore Cl

104 SierraMd

105 SilverMn

106 SmokyEye

107 SndOfSil

108 TblWater

109 WhisprSx

ROCK & FUSION

110 DavAgain

111 JumpRock

112 OyComCha

113 PickUpPc

114 RdRiverR

115 SatsfyGt

116 Sheriff

117 SmokeWtr

118 TwistAgn

119 VenusPop

RHYTHM & BLUES

120 AmazingG

121 BoogiePf

122 Clock Rk

123 CU later

124 HappyDay

125 JohnnyB

126 MercyBrs

127 RisingSn

128 S Preems

129 SuperStv

130 Yeh Orgn

HIP HOP HOUSE

131 2 of US

132 B Leave

133 Back St

134 FunkyTwn

135 KillSoft

136 MiamiTrn

137 Nine PM

138 SharpRap

139 SingBack

140 StrandD

M.D.B. No. M.D.B. Name

LATIN NIGHTS

141 BambaBrs

142 BambaFlt

143 BeHappy!

144 CopaLola

145 DayNight

146 Ipanema

147 MarinaAc

148 MuchoTrb

149 SmoothLt

150 SunOfLif

151 Sunshine

152 Tico Org

153 TrbWave

COUNTRY & WESTERN

154 BlownWnd

155 Bonanza

156 BoxerGtr

157 CntryRds

158 GreenGrs

159 Jambala

160 LondonSt

161 LooseEL

162 TopWorld

163 YlwRose

DISCO & PARTY

164 AlhHwaii

165 Babylon

166 Barbados

167 BirdySyn

168 FestaMex

169 HandsPty

170 LuvTheme

171 ModrnTlk

172 NxtAlice

173 PalomaFl

174 PubPiano

175 Tijuana

176 Why MCA?

BALLROOM

177 BrazilBr

178 CherryBr

179 CherryOr

180 DanubeWv

181 MantoStr

182 SandmnFx

183 SundyNvr

184 TangoPiz

185 Tea4Two

186 TulipWtz

187 YesSirQk

TRADITIONAL

188 AlpenTri

189 Balalaik

190 Ceilidh

191 CielPari

192 Cl Polka

193 Comrades

194 Funiculi

195 HappyPlk

196 Herzlin

197 HornPipe

198 JinglBel

199 Kufstein

200 MexiHat

201 MickyFlt

202 NavyAway

203 RlBarrel

204 SnowWtz

205 StarMrch

206 WashPost

207 WdCuttrs

208 XmasWalz

M.D.B. No. M.D.B. Name

Drum Kit List

• “ ” indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1”.

• Each percussion voice uses one note.

• The MIDI Note # and Note are actually one octave lower than keyboard

Note # and Note. For example, in “109: Standard Kit 1”, the “Seq Click H”

(Note# 36/Note C1) corresponds to (Note# 24/Note C0).

• Key Off: Keys marked “O” stop sounding the instant they are released.

• Voices with the same Alternate Note Number (*1 … 4) cannot be played

simultaneously. (They are designed to be played alternately with each

other.)

Voice No. 109 110 111 112 113 114

MSB/LSB/PC 127/000/000 127/000/001 127/000/008 127/000/016 127/000/024 127/000/025

Keyboard MIDI

Key

Off

Alternate

assign

Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Analog Kit

Note# Note

Note#

Note

25 C# 013C# -1 3 Surdo Mute

26 D 0 14 D -1 3 Surdo Open

27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q

28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap

29 F 0 17 F -1 4 Scratch Push

30 F# 018F# -1 4 Scratch Pull

31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap

32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise

33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click

34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell

35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L

36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H

37 C# 125C# 0 Brush Tap

38 D 1 26 D 0 O Brush Swirl

39 D# 127D# 0 Brush Slap

40 E 1 28 E 0 O Brush Tap Swirl Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal

41 F 1 29 F 0 O Snare Roll

42 F# 130F# 0 Castanet Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2

43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare H Soft Snare H Soft 2 SD Rock H Snare L SD Rock H

44 G# 132G# 0 Sticks

45 A 1 33 A 0 Bass Drum Soft Bass Drum H Bass Drum H

46 A# 134A# 0 Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot 2

47 B 1 35 B 0 Bass Drum Hard Bass Drum H BD Rock BD Analog L

48 C 2 36 C 1 Bass Drum Bass Drum 2 BD Rock BD Gate BD Analog H

49 C# 237C# 1 Side Stick Analog Side Stick

50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare M Snare M 2 SD Room L SD Rock L SD Rock L Analog Snare 1

51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap

52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare H Hard Snare H Hard 2 SD Room H SD Rock Rim SD Rock H Analog Snare 2

53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L Room Tom 1 Rock Tom 1 E Tom 1 Analog Tom 1

54 F# 242F# 1 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog HH Closed 1

55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H Room Tom 2 Rock Tom 2 E Tom 2 Analog Tom 2

56 G# 244G# 1 1 Hi-Hat Pedal Analog HH Closed 2

57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom Room Tom 3 Rock Tom 3 E Tom 3 Analog Tom 3

58 A# 246A# 1 1 Hi-Hat Open Analog HH Open

59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L Room Tom 4 Rock Tom 4 E Tom 4 Analog Tom 4

60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H Room Tom 5 Rock Tom 5 E Tom 5 Analog Tom 5

61 C# 349C# 2 Crash Cymbal 1 Analog Cymbal

62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom Room Tom 6 Rock Tom 6 E Tom 6 Analog Tom 6

63 D# 351D# 2 Ride Cymbal 1

64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal

65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup

66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine

67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal

68 G# 356G# 2 Cowbell Analog Cowbell

69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2

70 A# 358A# 2 Vibraslap

71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2

72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H

73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L

74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute Analog Conga H

75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open Analog Conga M

76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L Analog Conga L

77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H

78 F# 466F# 3 Timbale L

79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H

80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L

81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa

82 A# 470A# 3 Maracas Analog Maracas

83 B 4 71 B 3 O Samba Whistle H

84 C 5 72 C 4 O Samba Whistle L

85 C# 573C# 4 Guiro Short

86 D 5 74 D 4 O Guiro Long

87 D# 575D# 4 Claves Analog Claves

88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H

89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L

90 F# 578F# 4 Cuica Mute Scratch Push Scratch Push

91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open Scratch Pull Scratch Pull

92 G# 580G# 4 2 Triangle Mute

93 A 5 81 A 4 2 Triangle Open

94 A# 582A# 4 Shaker

95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bell

96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree

97 C# 685C# 5

98 D 6 86 D 5

99 D# 687D# 5

100 E 6 88 E 5

101 F 6 89 F 5

102 F# 690F# 5

103 G 6 91 G 5

F#1

G#1

A#1

D#1

C#1

F#2

G#2

A#2

D#2

C#2

F#3

G#3

A#3

D#3

C#3

F#4

G#4

A#4

D#4

C#4

F#5

G#5

A#5

D#5

C#5

Drum Kit List

Voice No. 109 115 116 117 118 119 120

MSB/LSB/PC 127/000/000 127/000/027 127/000/032 127/000/040 127/000/048 126/000/000 126/000/001

Keyboard MIDI

Key

Off

Alternate

assign

Standard Kit 1 Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2

Note# Note Note# Note

25 C# 013C# -1 3 Surdo Mute

26 D 0 14 D -1 3 Surdo Open

27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q

28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap

29 F 0 17 F -1 4 Scratch Push

30 F# 018F# -1 4 Scratch Pull

31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap

32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise

33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click

34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell

35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L

36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H

37 C# 125C# 0 Brush Tap

38 D 1 26 D 0 O Brush Swirl

39 D# 127D# 0 Brush Slap

40 E 1 28 E 0 O Brush Tap Swirl Reverse Cymbal

41 F 1 29 F 0 O Snare Roll

42 F# 130F# 0 Castanet Hi Q 2

43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare H Soft AnSD Snappy SD Jazz H Light Brush Slap L

44 G# 132G# 0 Sticks

45 A 1 33 A 0 Bass Drum Soft AnBD Dance-1 Bass Drum L

46 A# 134A# 0 Open Rim Shot AnSD OpenRim

47 B 1 35 B 0 Bass Drum Hard AnBD Dance-2 Gran Cassa

48 C 2 36 C 1 Bass Drum AnBD Dance-3 BD Jazz BD Jazz Gran Cassa Mute Cutting Noise Phone Call

49 C# 237C# 1 Side Stick Analog Side Stick Cutting Noise 2 Door Squeak

50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare M AnSD Q SD Jazz L Brush Slap Marching Sn M Door Slam

51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap String Slap Scratch Cut

52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare H Hard AnSD Ana+Acoustic SD Jazz M Brush Tap Marching Sn H Scratch

53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L Analog Tom 1 Jazz Tom 1 Brush Tom 1 Jazz Tom 1 Wind Chime

54 F# 242F# 1 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog HH Closed 3 Telephone Ring 2

55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H Analog Tom 2 Jazz Tom 2 Brush Tom 2 Jazz Tom 2

56 G# 244G# 1 1 Hi-Hat Pedal Analog HH Closed 4

57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom Analog Tom 3 Jazz Tom 3 Brush Tom 3 Jazz Tom 3

58 A# 246A# 1 1 Hi-Hat Open Analog HH Open 2

59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L Analog Tom 4 Jazz Tom 4 Brush Tom 4 Jazz Tom 4

60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H Analog Tom 5 Jazz Tom 5 Brush Tom 5 Jazz Tom 5

61 C# 349C# 2 Crash Cymbal 1 Analog Cymbal Hand Cym. L

62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom Analog Tom 6 Jazz Tom 6 Brush Tom 6 Jazz Tom 6

63 D# 351D# 2 Ride Cymbal 1 Hand Cym.Short L

64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal Flute Key Click Car Engine Ignition

65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Car Tires Squeal

66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine Car Passing

67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal Car Crash

68 G# 356G# 2 Cowbell Analog Cowbell

Siren

69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2

Hand Cym. H Train

70 A# 358A# 2 Vibraslap Jet Plane

71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Hand Cym.Short H Starship

72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H

Burst

73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L Roller Coaster

74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute Analog Conga H

Submarine

75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open Analog Conga M

76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L Analog Conga L

77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H

78 F# 466F# 3 Timbale L

79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H

80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L Shower Laugh

81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa Thunder Scream

82 A# 470A# 3 Maracas Analog Maracas

Wind Punch

83 B 4 71 B 3 O Samba Whistle H Stream Heartbeat

84 C 5 72 C 4 O Samba Whistle L

Bubble FootSteps

85 C# 573C# 4 Guiro Short Feed

86 D 5 74 D 4 O Guiro Long

87 D# 575D# 4 Claves Analog Claves

88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H

89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L

90 F# 578F# 4 Cuica Mute Scratch Push

91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open Scratch Pull

92 G# 580G# 4 2 Triangle Mute

93 A 5 81 A 4 2 Triangle Open

94 A# 582A# 4 Shaker

95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bell

96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree Dog Machine Gun

97 C# 685C# 5 Horse Laser Gun

98 D 6 86 D 5 Bird Tweet 2 Explosion

99 D# 687D# 5 Firework

100 E 6 88 E 5

101 F 6 89 F 5

102 F# 690F# 5 Ghost

103 G 6 91 G 5 Maou

F#1

G#1

A#1

D#1

C#1

F#2

G#2

A#2

D#2

C#2

F#3

G#3

A#3

D#3

C#3

F#4

G#4

A#4

D#4

C#4

F#5

G#5

A#5

D#5

C#5

MIDI Implementation Chart

YAMAHA [ Portable Keyboard ] Date:25-Jan-2002

Model PSR-292 MIDI Implementation Chart Version : 1.0

Transmitted Recognized Remarks

Function...

Basic Default 1 - 16 1 - 16 *1

Channel Changed x x

Default 3 3

Mode Messages x x

Altered ************** x

Note 0 - 127 0 - 127

Number : True voice ************** 0 - 127

Velocity Note ON o 9nH,v=1-127 o 9nH,v=1-127

Note OFF o 9nH,v=0 o 9nH,v=0 or 8nH

After Key's x x

Touch Ch's x x

Pitch Bend x o

Prog o 0 - 127 o 0 - 127

Change : True # **************

System Exclusive o *3 o *3

: Song Pos. x x

Common : Song Sel. x x

: Tune x x

System : Clock o o

Real Time: Commands o *4 o *4

Aux :All Sound OFF o o(120,126,127)

:Reset All Cntrls x o(121)

:Local ON/OFF x o(122) *5

:All Notes OFF x o(123-125)

Mes- :Active Sense o o

sages:Reset x x

Mode 1 : OMNI ON , POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON ,MONO o : Yes

Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF,MONO x : No

0,32 o o Bank Select

1 x *2 o Modulation wheel

6 x o Data Entry(MSB)

38 x o Data Entry(LSB)

7o o Part Volume

10 o o Pan

Control 11 x *2 o Expression

64 o o Sustain

Change 71 x *2 o Harmonic Content

72 x *2 o Release Time

73 x *2 o Attack Time

74 x *2 o Brightness

84 x *2 o Portamento Cntrl

91,93,94 o o Effect Depth

96,97 x o RPN Inc,Dec

100,101 x *2 o RPN LSB,MSB

MIDI Implementation Chart

NOTE:

*1 By default (factory settings) the PSR-292 ordinarily functions as a 16-channel

multi-timbral tone generator, and incoming data does not affect the panel

voices or panel settings. However, the MIDI messages listed below do affect

the panel voices, auto accompaniment, and songs.

• MIDI Master Tuning

• System exclusive messages for changing the Reverb Type, Chorus Type,

and DSP Type.

*2 Messages for these control change numbers cannot be transmitted from the

PSR-292 itself. However, they may be transmitted when playing the accompa-

niment, song or using the Harmony effect.

*3 Exclusive

<GM System ON> F0H, 7EH, 7FH, 09H, 01H, F7H

• This message automatically restores all default settings for the instrument,

with the exception of MIDI Master Tuning.

<MIDI Master Volume> F0H, 7FH, 7FH, 04H, 01H, ll, mm, F7H

• This message allows the volume of all channels to be changed simulta-

neously (Universal System Exclusive).

• The values of “mm” is used for MIDI Master Tuning. (Values for “ll” are

ignored.)

<MIDI Master Tuning> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 27H, 30H, 00H, 00H, mm, ll, cc, F7H

• This message simultaneously changes the tuning value of all channels.

• The values of “mm” and “ll” are used for MIDI Master Tuning.

• The default value of “mm” and “ll” are 08H and 00H, respectively. Any val-

ues can be used for “n” and “cc.”

<Reverb Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 00H, mmH, llH, F7H

• mm : Reverb Type MSB

• ll : Reverb Type LSB

Refer to the Effect Map (page 92) for details.

<Chorus Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 20H, mmH, llH, F7H

• mm : Chorus Type MSB

• ll : Chorus Type LSB

Refer to the Effect Map (page 92) for details.

<DSP Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 40H, mmH, llH, F7H

• mm : DSP Type MSB

• ll : DSP Type LSB

Refer to the Effect Map (page 92) for details.

<DRY Level> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 08H, 0mH, 11H, llH, F7H

• ll : Dry Level

• 0m : Channel Number

<XG Parametter Change> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, hh, mm, ll, dd, F7H

• hh mm ll : address

• dd : data

<XG Bulk Dump> F0H, 43H, 0nH, 4CH, aa, bb, hh, mm, ll, dd, cc, F7H

• 0n : Device Number n=0 (send), 0 - f (receive)

• aa bb : Byte Count (aa << 7) + bb

• hh mm ll : address

• dd : data

F0H, 43H, 73H, 7FH, mID, 06H, 0AH, aa, bb, cc, dd, hh, mm, ll, bulk data, sum, F7H

• mID : model ID PSR-292=2BH

• 06H : Bulk ID

• 0AH : Bulk No.

• aa : Byte Count MSB

• bb : Byte Count LSB

• cc : amount of valid MSB data

• dd : amount of valid LSB data

• hh mm ll : address

• bulk data : Sequence data (1byte, 2byte...7byte, MSB data)

• sum : Check Sum = 0-sum (bulk data)

F0H, 43H, 73H, 7FH, mID, 06H, 09H, aa, bb, cc, dd, hh, mm, ll, bulk data, sum, F7H

• mID : model ID PSR-292=2BH

• 06H : Bulk ID

• 09H : Bulk No.

• aa : Byte Count MSB

• bb : Byte Count LSB

• cc : amount of valid MSB data

• dd : amount of valid LSB data

• hh mm ll : address

• bulk data : Sequence data (low 4bit, high 4 bit...low 4bit, high 4 bit)

• sum : Check Sum = 0-sum (bulk data)

*4 When the accompaniment is started, an FAH message is transmitted. When

accompaniment is stopped, an FCH message is transmitted.When the clock is

set to External, both FAH (accompaniment start) and FCH (accompaniment

stop) are recognized.

*5 Local ON/OFF

<Local ON> Bn, 7A, 7F

<Local OFF> Bn, 7A, 00

Value for “n” is ignored.

MIDI Implementation Chart

■ Effect map

* If the received value does not contain an effect type in the TYPE LSB, the

LSB will be directed to TYPE 0.

* The numbers in parentheses in front of the Effect Type names correspond

to the number indicated in the display..

* By using an external sequencer, which is capable of editing and transmitting

the system exclusive messages and parameter changes, you can select the

Reverb, Chorus and DSP effect types which are not accessible from the

PSR-292 panel itself. When one of the effects is selected by the external se-

quencer, “ - ” will be shown on the display.

● REVERB

● CHORUS

● DSP

TYPE

MSB

TYPE LSB

00 01 02 08 16 17 18 19 20

000 No Effect

001 (1)Hall1 (2)Hall2

002 Room (3)Room1 (4)Room2

003 Stage (5)Stage1 (6)Stage2

004 Plate (7)Plate1 (8)Plate2

005...127 No Effect

TYPE

MSB

TYPE LSB

00 01 02 08 16 17 18 19 20

000...064 No Effect

065 Chorus Chorus2

066 Celeste Chorus1

067 Flanger Flanger1 Flanger2

068...127 No Effect

TYPE

MSB

TYPE LSB

00 01 02 08 16 17 18 19 20

000 No Effect

001 (1)Hall1 (2)Hall2

002 Room (3)Room1 (4)Room2

003 Stage (5)Stage1 (6)Stage2

004 Plate (7)Plate1 (8)Plate2

005 Delay L,C,R (26)Delay L,C,R

006 (27)Delay L,R

007 (28)Echo

008 (29)Cross Delay

009

(9)Early Reflection1 (10)Early Reflection2

010 (11)Gate Reverb

011 (12)Reverse Gate

012...019 No Effect

020 (30)Karaoke

021...064 No Effect

065 Chorus (14)Chorus2

066 Celeste (13)Chorus1

067 Flanger

(15)Flanger1

(16)Flanger2

068 Symphonic (17)Symphonic

069 Rotary Speaker

(19)Rotary Speaker1

070 Tremolo (21)Tremolo1

071 Auto Pan (24)Auto Pan

(20)Rotary Speaker2

(22)Tremolo2

(23)Guitar Tremolo

072 (18)Phaser

073 Distortion

074 (33)Overdrive

075

(34)Amp Simulation

(31)Distortion Hard

(32)Distortion Soft

076 (36)3Band EQ

(35)EQ Telephone

077 (37)2Band EQ

078 Auto Wah (25)Auto Wah

079...127 No Effect

Effect map

Specifications

Keyboards

• 61 standard-size keys (C1 - C6), with Touch Response.

Display

• Large multi-function LCD display (backlit)

Setup

• STANDBY/ON

• MASTER VOLUME : MIN - MAX

Panel Controls

• SONG, VOICE, STYLE, M.D.B., DICTIONARY, DJ, PC,

LESSON L, R, METRONOME, PORTABLE GRAND,

DEMO, FUNCTION(TRANSPOSE), TOUCH, HARMONY,

DUAL, SPLIT, TEMPO/TAP, ONE TOUCH SETTING, [0]-

[9], [+](YES), [-](NO), CATEGORY, SELECT, Dial

Voice

• 108 panel voices + 12 drum kits + 480 XG voices +

5 DJ voices

• Polyphony : 32

• DUAL

• SPLIT

Style

• 135 styles

• Style Control : ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC STOP, SYNC

START, START/STOP, INTRO ENDING,

MAIN/AUTO FILL

• Fingering : Multi fingering

• Style Volume

Music Database

• 208

Yamaha Educational Suite

• Dictionary

• Lesson 1-4

One Touch Setting

• Preset A and B (for each style)

• Memory

Function

• Transpose, Tuning, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Main

Voice – Volume; Octave; Pan; Reverb Send Level; Chorus

Send Level; DSP Send Level, Dual Voice – Voice; Volume;

Octave; Pan; Reverb Send Level; Chorus Send Level; DSP

Send Level, Split Voice – Voice; Volume; Octave; Pan; Re-

verb Send Level; Chorus Send Level; DSP Send Level, Re-

verb Type, Chorus Type, DSP Type, Harmony Type,

Harmony Volume, Local On/Off, External Clock, Bulk Data

Send, Initial Setup Send, Keyboard Out, Style Out, Song

Out, Style Volume, Song Volume, Metronome Volume,

Time Signature, Lesson Track (R), Lesson Track (L), Grade

On/Off, Demo and DJ Cancel

Effects

• Reverb : 8 types

• Chorus : 4 types

• DSP : 38 types

• Harmony : 26 types

Song

• 100 Songs + 5 User Songs + Flash Memory

• Song Clear, Track Clear

• Song Volume

Recording

• Song

User Song : 5 Songs

Recording Tracks : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, STYLE

MIDI

• Local On/Off • Initial Setup Send • External Clock

• Bulk Data Send • Keyboard Out • Style Out

• Song Out

Auxiliary jacks

• PHONES/OUTPUT, DC IN 12V, MIDI IN/OUT,

SUSTAIN

Ampliﬁer

• 3.0W + 3.0W

Speakers

• 12cm x 2 + 3cm x 2

Power Consumption (when using PA-3C power adaptor)

• UL/CSA :14W

• CE :15W

Power Supply

• Adaptor : Yamaha PA-3C AC power adaptor

• Batteries : Six “D” size, R20P (LR20) or equivalent

batteries

Dimensions (W x D x H)

• 952 x 389 x 140 mm (37-1/2" x 15-1/3" x 5-1/2")

Weight

• 6.8 kg (15 lbs.)

Supplied Accessories

• Music Stand

• Owner’s Manual

• Song Book

* Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for

information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right

to change or modify products or specifications at any time

without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or op-

tions may not be the same in every locale, please check with

your Yamaha dealer.

Optional Accessories

• Headphones : HPE-150

• AC power adaptor : PA-3B/3C

• Footswitch : FC4, FC5

• Keyboard stand : L-2C

Panel controls and terminals

+/- ............................................... 9, 24

A-B REPEAT.............................. 9, 53

ACMP ......................................... 9

, 36

CATEGORY ............................... 8, 23

DC IN 12V ................................. 9, 10

DEMO ........................................ 8, 14

Dial ............................................. 8, 24

DICTIONARY............................ 8, 45

DJ................................................ 8, 22

DUAL ......................................... 8, 26

FF................................................ 9, 53

FUNCTION................................ 8, 74

HARMONY ............................... 8

, 31

INTRO ENDING........................ 9, 36

LEFT................................................53

LESSON ..................................... 8, 62

M.D.B. ........................................ 8, 48

MAIN/AUTO FILL .................... 9, 36

MASTER VOLUME .........................8

MEMORY .................................. 9, 29

METRONOME .......................... 8, 20

MIDI IN...................................... 9, 67

MIDI OUT.................................. 9, 67

NO ........................................9, 59, 60

Numeric keypad.......................... 9, 24

ONE TOUCH SETTING............ 9, 28

PAUSE ........................................ 9, 53

PC ............................................... 8, 73

PHONES/OUTPUT.................... 9, 11

PORTABLE GRAND................. 8, 20

REC .................................................57

RECORD...........................................9

REW ........................................... 9, 53

RIGHT.............................................53

SELECT ..................................... 8, 24

SONG .............................8, 51, 57, 61

SONG MEMORY ...................... 9

, 57

SPLIT ......................................... 8

, 27

STANDBY/ON........................... 8, 11

START/STOP ....................... 9

, 36, 53

STYLE........................................ 8

, 35

SUSTAIN.................................... 9, 11

SYNC START ............................ 9

, 36

SYNC STOP............................... 9

, 36

TEMPO/TAP ........................ 9, 20, 41

TOUCH ...................................... 8, 30

VOICE ........................................ 8, 23

YES.......................................9, 59, 60

Misc.

#000 OTS ........................................ 26

A-B repreat ..................................... 54

AC Power adaptor........................... 10

accessory jacks................................ 11

accompaniment sections ................. 42

Accompaniment Split Point ............ 27

Batteries .......................................... 10

Beat display..................................... 51

beat marks ....................................... 51

Bulk................................................. 69

Chord Names .................................. 47

Chord Track .................................... 57

Chord Type...................................... 47

Chords, About ................................. 46

Chords, Fingered............................. 43

Chords, Single Finger ..................... 43

Chorus............................................. 32

Clearing, Song ................................ 59

DEMO Cancel................................. 14

Demo song ...................................... 14

Dictionary ....................................... 45

DJ .................................................... 22

Drum Kit Voice Chart ..................... 88

DSP ................................................. 32

Dual Voice....................................... 26

Effects ............................................. 31

Ending............................................. 36

External Clock ................................ 69

Fill-in .............................................. 42

Fingered chords............................... 43

Flash memory ...........................71

, 78

Footswitch....................................... 11

Function .......................................... 74

GM System Level 1 ........................ 66

Grade............................................... 65

Harmony ......................................... 31

Headphones..................................... 11

Indicator .......................................... 18

Initial Setup Send ............................ 69

Initialization .................................... 78

Internal Clock.................................. 69

Intro ................................................. 38

Left .................................................. 62

Lesson .............................................61

Lesson Track ................................... 63

Level, chorus send........................... 32

Level, DSP send .............................. 32

Level, reverb send ...........................31

Local on/off ..................................... 69

M.D.B. (music database)................. 48

Main A/B......................................... 42

Main Voice....................................... 25

Master Volume................................... 8

Melody Voice Change ..................... 55

Metronome ...................................... 20

MIDI................................................ 66

MIDI channels................................. 67

MIDI Implementation Chart ........... 90

MIDI LSB Receive cancel .............. 70

MIDI terminals................................ 67

Multi Fingering ............................... 43

Music Stand..................................... 19

Octave.............................................. 19

Octave, dual..................................... 26

Octave, main.................................... 25

Octave, split..................................... 27

One Touch Setting........................... 28

Pan, dual.......................................... 26

Pan, main......................................... 25

Pan, split.......................................... 27

PC.................................................... 73

Portable Grand ................................20

Quick Guide .................................... 12

recording, song................................ 56

Reverb ............................................. 31

Right................................................ 62

Root ................................................. 46

Index

sections (accompaniment) ...............42

Single Finger chords........................43

Song Clear .......................................59

Song Filer ........................................72

Song Volume....................................55

songs, playing ..................................53

songs, recording...............................56

songs, selecting................................51

Speciﬁcations...................................93

Split Point ........................................27

Split Voice........................................27

Style Volume....................................42

styles, playing ..................................36

styles, selecting................................35

Sync Start.........................................37

Sync Stop.........................................40

Tap................................................... 37

Tempo .......................................20, 41

Time Signature................................ 21

Touch Sensitivity............................. 30

track (song) ..................................... 57

tracks, muting.................................. 58

Transpose ........................................ 29

Troubleshooting .............................. 77

Tuning ............................................. 29

User songs....................................... 56

Voice List......................................... 79

voices, Drum Kit ............................. 88

voices, selecting and playing........... 23

voices, XG....................................... 80

Volume, dual.................................... 26

Volume, harmony ............................ 31

Volume, main .................................. 25

Volume, Metronome........................ 21

Volume, Song .................................. 55

Volume, split.................................... 27

Volume, Style .................................. 42

XG voices........................................ 80

Limited Warranty

90 DAYS LABOR 1 YEAR PARTS

Yamaha Corporation of America, hereafter referred to as Yamaha, warrants to the original consumer of a product included in the categories listed

below, that the product will be free of defects in materials and/or workmanship for the periods indicated. This warranty is applicable to all models

included in the following series of products:

PSR SERIES OF PORTATONE ELECTRONIC KEYBOARDS

If during the ﬁrst 90 days that immediately follows the purchase date, your new Yamaha product covered by this warranty is found to have a defect

in material and/or workmanship, Yamaha and/or its authorized representative will repair such defect without charge for parts or labor.

If parts should be required after this 90 day period but within the one year period that immediately follows the purchase date, Yamaha will, subject

to the terms of this warranty, supply these parts without charge. However, charges for labor, and/or any miscellaneous expenses incurred are the

consumers responsibility. Yamaha reserves the right to utilize reconditioned parts in repairing these products and/or to use reconditioned units as

warranty replacements.

THIS WARRANTY IS THE ONLY EXPRESS WARRANTY WHICH YAMAHA MAKES IN CONNECTION WITH THESE PROD-

UCTS. ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF MERCHANT ABILITY

IS LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY. YAMAHA EXCLUDES AND SHALL NOT BE LIABLE IN ANY

EVENT FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.

Some states do not allow limitations that relate to implied warranties and/or the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages. Therefore, these

limitations and exclusions may not apply to you.

This warranty gives you speciﬁc legal rights. You may also have other rights which vary from state to state.

CONSUMERS RESPONSIBILITIES

If warranty service should be required, it is necessary that the consumer assume certain responsibilities:

1. Contact the Customer Service Department of the retailer selling the product, or any retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product for

assistance. You may also contact Yamaha directly at the address provided below.

2. Deliver the unit to be serviced under warranty to: the retailer selling the product, an authorized service center, or to Yamaha with an explanation

of the problem. Please be prepared to provide proof purchase date (sales receipt, credit card copy, etc.) when requesting service and/or parts

under warranty.

3. Shipping and/or insurance costs are the consumers responsibility.* Units shipped for service should be packed securely.

*Repaired units will be returned PREPAID if warranty service is required within the ﬁrst 90 days.

IMPORTANT: Do NOT ship anything to ANY location without prior authorization. A Return Authorization (RA) will be issued that has

a tracking number assigned that will expedite the servicing of your unit and provide a tracking system if needed.

4. Your owners manual contains important safety and operating instructions. It is your responsibility to be aware of the contents of this manual and

to follow all safety precautions.

EXCLUSIONS

This warranty does not apply to units whose trade name, trademark, and/or ID numbers have been altered, defaced, exchanged removed, or to fail-

ures and/or damages that may occur as a result of:

1. Neglect, abuse, abnormal strain, modiﬁcation or exposure to extremes in temperature or humidity.

2. Improper repair or maintenance by any person who is not a service representative of a retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product, an

authorized service center, or an authorized service representative of Yamaha.

3. This warranty is applicable only to units sold by retailers authorized by Yamaha to sell these products in the U.S.A., the District of Columbia,

and Puerto Rico. This warranty is not applicable in other possessions or territories of the U.S.A. or in any other country.

Please record the model and serial number of the product you have purchased in the spaces provided below.

Model___________________________ Serial #________________________________ Sales Slip #________________________________

Purchased from____________________________________________________________ Date______________________________________

(Retailer)

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA

Electronic Service Division

6600 Orangethorpe Avenue

Buena Park, CA 90620

KEEP THIS DOCUMENT FOR YOUR RECORDS. DO NOT MAIL!

HEAD OFFICE

Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-3273

[PK] 32

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha

representative or the authorized distributor listed below.

Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou

au distributeur le plus proche de vous ﬁgurant dans la liste suivante.

Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten

Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen

Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.

Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana

o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,

M1S 3R1, Canada

Tel: 416-298-1311

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,

U.S.A.

Tel: 714-522-9011

MEXICO

Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V.,

Departamento de ventas

Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del

Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F.

Tel: 55-5804-0600

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA.

Av. Rebouças 2636, São Paulo, Brasil

Tel: 011-3085-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Sucursal de Argentina

Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: 1-4371-7021

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,

Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,

Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá

Tel: +507-269-5311

THE UNITED KINGDOM

Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, England

Tel: 01908-366700

IRELAND

Danfay Ltd.

61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin

Tel: 01-2859177

GERMANY

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Switzerland

Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland

Tel: 01-383 3990

AUSTRIA

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-60203900

THE NETHERLANDS

Yamaha Music Central Europe,

Branch Nederland

Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands

Tel: 0347-358 040

BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Belgium

Rue de Geneve (Genevastraat) 10, 1140 - Brussels,

Belgium

Tel: 02-726 6032

FRANCE

Yamaha Musique France

BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France

Tel: 01-64-61-4000

ITALY

Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.

Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy

Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN/PORTUGAL

Yamaha-Hazen Música, S.A.

Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230

Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain

Tel: 91-639-8888

GREECE

Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House

147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece

Tel: 01-228 2160

SWEDEN

Yamaha Scandinavia AB

J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1

Box 30053

S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: 031 89 34 00

DENMARK

YS Copenhagen Liaison Ofﬁce

Generatorvej 8B

DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark

Tel: 44 92 49 00

FINLAND

F-Musiikki Oy

Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,

SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland

Tel: 09 618511

NORWAY

Norsk ﬁlial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB

Grini Næringspark 1

N-1345 Østerås, Norway

Tel: 67 16 77 70

ICELAND

Skifan HF

Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120

IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland

Tel: 525 5000

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: +49-4101-3030

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2312

TURKEY/CYPRUS

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Gulf FZE

LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone

P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E.

Tel: +971-4-881-5868

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.

25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West),

Jingan, Shanghai, China

Tel: 021-6247-2211

HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,

Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel: 2737-7688

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)

PT. Nusantik

Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: 21-520-2577

KOREA

Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.

Tong-Yang Securities Bldg. 16F 23-8 Yoido-dong,

Youngdungpo-ku, Seoul, Korea

Tel: 02-3770-0660

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.

Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,

Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia

Tel: 3-78030900

PHILIPPINES

Yupangco Music Corporation

339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,

Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines

Tel: 819-7551

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.

No.11 Ubi Road 1, No.06-02,

Meiban Industrial Building, Singapore

Tel: 747-4374

TAIWAN

Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.

3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.

Taiwan 104, R.O.C.

Tel: 02-2511-8688

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

891/1 Siam Motors Building, 15-16 ﬂoor

Rama 1 road, Wangmai, Pathumwan

Bangkok 10330, Thailand

Tel: 02-215-2626

OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2317

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,

Victoria 3006, Australia

Tel: 3-9693-5111

NEW ZEALAND

Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd.

146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa,

Auckland, New Zealand

Tel: 9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2312

NORTH AMERICA

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

EUROPE

AFRICA

MIDDLE EAST

ASIA

OCEANIA

U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation

V874220 ???PO???.?-01C0 Printed in China

Yamaha PK CLUB (Portable Keyboard Home Page, English only)

http://www.yamahaPKclub.com/

Yamaha Manual Library

http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/

Documenttranscriptie

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being charged. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. When installing batteries, do not mix batteries with new, or with batteries of a different type. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information. The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. 2 Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly. NAME PLATE LOCATION: NOTICE: 92-BP (bottom) Warning: The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. Model Serial No. Purchase Date PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. (class B) OBSERVERA! Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) sá länge som den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av. ADVARSEL: Netspæendingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt, sálæenge netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t endt — ogsá selvom der or slukket pá apparatets afbryder. VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko laitetta verkosta. (standby) Entsorgung leerer Batterien (nur innerhalb Deutschlands) Leisten Sie einen Beitrag zum Umweltschutz. Verbrauchte Batterien oder Akkumulatoren dürfen nicht in den Hausmüll. Sie können bei einer Sammelstelle für Altbatterien bzw. Sondermüll abgegeben werden. Informieren Sie sich bei Ihrer Kommune. (battery) 1 3 PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC power adaptor Water warning • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Use the specified adaptor (PA-3C or PA-3B or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. • Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. Do not open • Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. Fire warning • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. If you notice any abnormality • If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: • Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not intended to be charged. Power supply/AC power adaptor • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. • When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be used for a long time, remove the batteries from the instrument to prevent possible leakage of the battery fluid. • Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or during electrical storms. • Keep batteries away from children. • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • If the batteries do leak, avoid contact with the leaked fluid. If the battery fluid should come in contact with your eyes, mouth, or skin, wash immediately with water and consult a doctor. Battery fluid is corrosive and may possibly cause loss of sight or chemical burns. Battery Location • Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the +/- polarity markings. Failure to do so might result in overheating, fire, or battery fluid leakage. • Always replace all batteries at the same time. Do not use new batteries together with old ones. Also, do not mix battery types, such as alkaline batteries with manganese batteries, or batteries from different makers, or different types of batteries from the same maker, since this can cause overheating, fire, or battery fluid leakage. • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. • Do not dispose of batteries in fire. (4)-8 1/2 4 2 • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and other cables. • Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching the stand or rack, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over. Handling caution • Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. Connections • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. Maintenance • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. Saving data • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Saving and backing up your data • Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important data to external media such as the Yamaha MDF3 MIDI data filer. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. When using a power adaptor, even when the power switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet. Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations. The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may be different from the ones on your instrument. ● Regarding the song (or composition) “Just The Way You Are” included in this keyboard Composition Title : Just The Way You Are Composer’s Name : Billy Joel Copyright Owner’s Name : EMI MUSIC PUBLISHING LTD CAUTION : All Rights Reserved, Unauthorised copying, public performance and broadcasting are strictly prohibited. ● COPYRIGHT NOTICE This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, styles files, MIDI files, WAVE data and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES. ● Trademarks • Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. • Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders. (4)-8 2/2 3 5 Congratulations on your purchase of the Yamaha PSR-292 PortaTone! You now own a portable keyboard that combines advanced functions, great sound and exceptional ease-of-use in a highly compact package. Its outstanding features also make it a remarkably expressive and versatile instrument. Read this Owner’s Manual carefully while playing your new PSR-292 in order to take full advantage of its various features. Main Features The PSR-292 is a sophisticated yet easy-to-use keyboard with the following features and functions: ■ Stereo Sampled Piano .......................................................................... page 20 The PSR-292 has a special Portable Grand Piano Voice — created by state-of-the-art stereo sampling technology and using Yamaha’s sophiscated AWM (Advanced Wave memory) tone generation system. ■ Touch Response .................................................................................... page 30 The exceptionally natural Touch Response feature, with a convenient front panel on/off switch, gives you maximum expressive level control over the voices. It also works in conjunction with the Dynamic Filter, which dynamically adjusts the timbre or tone of a voice according to your playing strength — just a like a real musical instrument! ■ Yamaha Education Suite ......................................................... pages 43, 45, 61 The PSR-292 features the new Yamaha Education Suite — a set of learning tools that utilize the latest technology to make studying and practicing music more fun and fulfilling than ever before! ■ One Touch Setting ................................................................................. page 28 The One Touch Setting feature lets you automatically call up an appropriate voice for playing with the selected style. Each style has memory space for two One Touch Settings, and you can change them to your own desired voice setting — letting you save your custom panel settings for instant recall. ■ Powerful Speaker System The built-in stereo amplifier/speaker system of the PSR-292 — with a special Bass Boost feature — provides exceptionally powerful, high-quality sound, letting you hear the full dynamic range of the PSR-292’s authentic voices. ■ Music Database ..................................................................................... page 48 The PSR-292 has an advanced, easy-to-use Music Database feature that automatically selects the style, voice, and effect settings for playing in a specific type of music. This can be a big help if you know what genre of music you want to play, but you don’t know what settings to make. Just select the genre, and the PSR-292 takes care of the rest! ■ GM System Level 1 “GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level. ■ XGlite As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone generation format. Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in mind that some songs may play back differently compared to the original data, due to the reduced set of control parameters and effects. 6 Contents Panel Controls and Terminals ........................ 8 Selecting and Playing Songs ....................... 51 Setting Up....................................................... 10 • Selecting a Song...............................................51 • Playing the Songs.............................................53 • A-B Repeat .......................................................54 • Melody Voice Change.......................................55 • Adjusting the Song Volume ..............................55 • Power Requirements ........................................10 • Turning On the Power.......................................11 • Accessory Jacks ...............................................11 Quick Guide 12 Step 1 Voices ........................................................... 12 Step 2 Songs............................................................ 14 Step 3 Music Database............................................. 16 Song Recording............................................. 56 • Recording a User Song ....................................56 • Song Clear........................................................59 • Track Clear .......................................................60 Song Lesson .................................................. 61 DJ .................................................................... 22 • Using the Lesson Feature.................................61 • Select the Lesson Track ...................................63 • Lesson 1 — Timing...........................................63 • Lesson 2 — Waiting..........................................64 • Lesson 3 — Minus One ....................................64 • Lesson 4 — Both Hands...................................65 • Grade................................................................65 • Playing the DJ...................................................22 MIDI Functions............................................... 66 Playing Voices ............................................... 23 • What Is MIDI? ...................................................66 • Connecting to a Personal Computer.................68 • Local Control.....................................................69 • Using Initial Setup Send with a Sequencer.......69 • External Clock...................................................69 • Bulk Data Send.................................................69 • Keyboard Out....................................................70 • Style Out ...........................................................70 • Song Out...........................................................70 • Loading a Song into PSR-292’s Flash Memory 71 • PC Mode...........................................................73 Panel Display Indications ............................. 18 Portable Grand............................................... 20 • Playing the Portable Grand...............................20 • Using the Metronome .......................................20 • Playing a Voice .................................................23 • #000 OTS .........................................................26 • Dual Voice ........................................................26 • Split Voice.........................................................27 • Setting the Split Point .......................................27 • One Touch Setting............................................28 • Transpose and Tuning......................................29 • Touch and Touch Sensitivity.............................30 Effects............................................................. 31 • Harmony ...........................................................31 • Reverb ..............................................................31 • Chorus ..............................................................32 • DSP ..................................................................32 Selecting and Playing Styles ........................ 35 • Selecting a Style ...............................................35 • Playing the Styles .............................................36 • Sync Stop .........................................................40 • Changing the Tempo ........................................41 • Accompaniment Sections (Main A/B and Fill-ins). 42 • Adjusting the Style Volume...............................42 • Using Auto Accompaniment — Multi Fingering 43 • Dictionary..........................................................45 Using the Music Database ............................ 48 • Data stored by the Music Database..................50 Function ......................................................... 74 • Using the Function parameters.........................74 Troubleshooting ............................................ 77 Data Backup & Initialization ......................... 78 Voice List ....................................................... 79 Style List ........................................................ 86 Music Database List ...................................... 87 Drum Kit List .................................................. 88 MIDI Implementation Chart ........................... 90 Effect map ...................................................... 92 Specifications ................................................ 93 Index ............................................................... 94 7 Panel Controls and Terminals ■ Front Panel u e r t y i o !3 GrandPno 001 !0 !1 !2 !9 !5 !6 !7 !8 092 001 !4 @0 @1 q w @2 @3 @4 @5 @6 q Power switch ([STANDBY/ON]) w [MASTER VOLUME] dial This determines the overall volume of the PSR-292. e [TOUCH] button This turns the Touch function on and off. (See page 30.) r [HARMONY] button This turns the Harmony effect on and off. (See page 31.) @8 @9 !1 [METRONOME] button This turns the metronome on and off. (See page 20.) !2 [PORTABLE GRAND] button This instantly calls up the Grand Piano voice. (See page 12.) !3 [DEMO] button This is used to play the Demo song. (See page 14.) t [DUAL] button This turns the Dual voice on or off. (See page 26.) !4 [FUNCTION] Button This calls up the Function mode and stores the specified panel setting to the flash memory (see pages 74, 78). y [SPLIT] button This turns the Split voice on and off. (See page 27.) !5 [SONG] button This is for enabling song selection. (See page 51.) u [DICTIONARY] button This calls up the Dictionary function (page 45). !6 [STYLE] button This is for enabling style selection. (See page 35.) i [DJ] button This instantly calls up a special DJ voice and style. !7 [VOICE] button This is for enabling voice selection. (See page 23.) Holding down this button calls up the Melody Voice Change function. (See page 55.) r < r f !9 Dial, CATEGORY [ ]/[ ] buttons, SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons This dial is used to select the number of the desired song, voice, style or M.D.B.. (See page 24.) This also used to set the Tempo and Function value. The CATEGORY [ ]/[ ] buttons are used to select f !0 LESSON [L] (Left) and [R] (Right) buttons These call up the Lesson exercises for the corresponding hand (left or right) for the selected song. (See page 62.) !8 [M.D.B.] (MUSIC DATABASE) button This calls up the optimum panel settings for selected music genre. (See page 48.) > o [PC] Button This exceptionally convenient control lets you store and instantly call up the specified MIDI settings for optimum use with a connected computer or other MIDI device. (See page 73.) 8 @7 Panel Controls and Terminals < > the category of songs, voices, styles, M.D.B. or Functions. Pressing the buttons steps through the various categories. The SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons are used to decrease or increase the number of the desired song, voice, style, M.D.B., or specific Function, as well as to adjust certain settings. @0 Numeric keypad, [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons These are used for selecting songs, voices, and styles. (See pages 24.) They are also used for adjusting certain settings and answering certain display prompts. @1 [ACMP] / [A-B REPEAT] button When the Style mode is selected, this turns the auto accompaniment on and off. (See page 36.) In the Song mode, this calls up the A-B Repeat function. (See page 54.) @2 [SYNC STOP] button This turns the Sync Stop function on and off. (See page 40.) @3 [SYNC START] / [PAUSE] button This turns the Sync Start function on and off. (See page 37.) In the Song mode, it is used to temporarily pause song playback. (See page 53.) @4 [INTRO ENDING] / [REW r] button When the Style mode is selected, this is used to control the Intro and Ending functions. (See page 36.) When the Song mode is selected, this is used as a “rewind” control, or move the song playback point back toward the beginning. @5 [MAIN/AUTO FILL] / [FF f] button When the Style mode is selected, these are used to change auto accompaniment sections and control the Auto Fill function. (See page 42.) When the Song mode is selected, this is used as a “fast forward” control, or move the song playback point toward the end. @6 [START/STOP] button When the Style mode is selected, this alternately starts and stops the style. (See page 36.) In the Song mode, this alternately starts and stops song playback. (See page 54.) @7 [TEMPO/TAP] button This button is used to call up the Tempo setting, letting you set the Tempo with the dial, numeric keypad or [+]/[-] buttons. (See page 20.) It also allows you to tap out the tempo and automatically start a selected song or style at that tapped speed. (See page 37.) @8 ONE TOUCH SETTING buttons These buttons ([MEMORY], [1], [2]) are used to select the One Touch Setting registrations. (See page 28.) @9 SONG MEMORY buttons These buttons ([REC], [1] - [5], [A]) are used for song recording, letting you record up to six different tracks of a song (including a special Chord track). (See page 57.) ■ Rear Panel #0 #1 #0 MIDI IN, OUT terminals These are for connection to other MIDI instruments and devices. (See page 67.) #1 SUSTAIN jack This is for connection to an optional FC4 or FC5 Footswitch for control over sustain, just like the damper pedal on a piano. (See page 11.) #2 #3 #2 PHONES/OUTPUT jack This is for connection to a set of stereo headphones or to an external amplifier/speaker system. (See page 11.) #3 DC IN 12V jack This is for connection to a PA-3C or PA-3B AC power adaptor. (See page 10.) 9 Setting Up This section contains information about setting up your PSR-292 for playing. Make sure to read this section carefully before using the instrument. Power Requirements Although the PSR-292 will run either from an optional AC adaptor or batteries, Yamaha recommends use of an AC adaptor whenever possible. An AC adaptor is more environmentally friendly than batteries and does not deplete resources. • Never interrupt the power supply (e.g. remove the batteries or unplug the AC adaptor) during any PSR-292 record operation! Doing so can result in a loss of data. • Never attempt to turn the power off when a “WRITING!” message is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the internal flash memory and result in loss of data. ■ Using an AC Power Adaptor • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • q Make sure that the [STANDBY/ON] switch of the PSR-292 is set to STANDBY. w Connect the AC adaptor (PA-3C, PA-3B, or other adaptor specifically recommended by Yamaha) to the power supply jack. e Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet. w e • Use ONLY a Yamaha PA-3C or PA-3B AC Power Adaptor (or other adaptor specifically recommended by Yamaha) to power your instrument from the AC mains. The use of other adaptors may result in irreparable damage to both the adaptor and the PSR-292. • Unplug the AC Power Adaptor when not using the PSR-292, or during electrical storms. ■ Using Batteries • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • For battery operation the PSR-292 requires six 1.5V “D” size, R20P (LR20) or equivalent batteries. (Alkaline batteries are recommended.) When the batteries need to be replaced, the volume may be reduced, the sound may be distorted, and other problems may occur. When this happens, turn the power off and replace the batteries, as described below q Open the battery compartment cover located on the instrument’s bottom panel. w Insert the six new batteries, being careful to follow the polarity markings on the inside of the compartment. e Replace the compartment cover, making sure that it locks firmly in place. 10 • When the batteries run down, replace them with a complete set of six new batteries. NEVER mix old and new batteries. • Do not use different kinds of batteries (e.g. alkaline and manganese) at the same time. • If the instrument is not to be in use for a long time, remove the batteries from it, in order to prevent possible fluid leakage from the battery. Setting Up Turning On the Power With the AC power adaptor connected or with batteries installed, simply press the power switch until it locks in the ON position. When the instrument is not in use, be sure to turn the power off. (Press the switch again so that it pops up.) • Even when the switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the PSR-292 for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet, and/or remove the batteries from the instrument. • Never attempt to turn the power off when a “WRITING!” message is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the internal flash memory and result in loss of data. Accessory Jacks ■ Using Headphones• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • For private practicing and playing without disturbing others, connect a set of stereo headphones to the rear panel PHONES/OUTPUT jack. Sound from the built-in speaker system is automatically cut off when you insert a headphone plug into this jack. ■ Connecting a Keyboard Amplifier or Stereo System • • • • • • • Though the PSR-292 is equipped with a built-in speaker system, you can also play it through an external amplifier/speaker system. First, make sure the PSR-292 and any external devices are turned off, then connect one end of a stereo audio cable to the LINE IN or AUX IN jack(s) of the other device and the other end to the rear panel PHONES/OUTPUT jack on the PSR-292. Stereo System • To prevent damage to the speakers, set the volume of the external devices at the minimum setting before connecting them. Failure to observe these cautions may result in electric shock or equipment damage. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all devices at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. ■ Using a Footswitch • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • This feature lets you use an optional footswitch (Yamaha FC4 or FC5) to sustain the sound of the voices. The footswitch functions the same way as a damper pedal on an acoustic piano — press and hold down the footswitch as you play the keyboard to sustain the sound. • Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power. ■ Using the MIDI Terminals • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. Doing this changes the recognized polarity of the footswitch, resulting in reversed footswitch operation. The PSR-292 also features MIDI terminals, allowing you to interface the PSR-292 with other MIDI instruments and devices. (For more information, see page 67.) MIDI instrument 11 Quick Guide Step 1 Voices w q GrandPno 001 z z 092 001 q r Playing the Piano Simply by pressing the [PORTABLE GRAND] button, you can automatically select the Grand Piano voice. z Press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button. Playing along with the Metronome z Press the [METRONOME] button. GrandPno 001 x Play the keyboard. Want to find out more? See page 20. Want to find out more? See page 20. ● Panel Voice List No. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 12 Voice Name PIANO Grand Piano Bright Piano Honky-tonk Piano MIDI Grand Piano CP 80 Harpsichord E.PIANO Galaxy EP Funky Electric Piano DX Modern Elec. Piano Hyper Tines Venus Electric Piano Clavi * This list includes only a portion of the total available voices. No. 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 Voice Name ORGAN Jazz Organ 1 Jazz Organ 2 Click Organ Bright Organ Rock Organ Purple Organ 16'+2' Organ 16'+4' Organ Theater Organ Church Organ Chapel Organ Reed Organ No. 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 Voice Name ACCORDION Traditional Accordion Musette Accordion Bandoneon Harmonica GUITAR Classical Guitar Folk Guitar 12Strings Guitar Jazz Guitar Octave Guitar Clean Guitar 60’s Clean Guitar Muted Guitar Overdriven Guitar No. 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 Voice Name Distortion Guitar BASS Acoustic Bass Finger Bass Pick Bass Fretless Bass Slap Bass Synth Bass Hi-Q Bass Dance Bass STRINGS String Ensemble Chamber Strings Synth Strings Slow Strings No. 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 Voice Name Tremolo Strings Pizzicato Strings Orchestra Hit Violin Cello Contrabass Banjo Harp CHOIR Choir Vocal Ensemble Vox Humana Air Choir Step 1 Voices Selecting and Playing Other Voices The PSR-292 has a huge total of 605 dynamic and realistic instrument voices. Let’s try a few of them out now... q Press the [VOICE] button. w Select a voice. BritePno or 002 001 f r • You can also select the appropriate category by using the [ ]/[ ] buttons. GrandPno e Play the keyboard. Want to find out more? See page 23. Playing with the DJ Feature The exciting new DJ feature gives you a full variety of dance and DJ sounds — letting you create your own real-time mixes and groove along with various contemporary rhythms. q Press the [DJ] button. e Play the DJ voices. DJ Set 1 000 r Stop the DJ style. w Play the DJ style. Accompaniment area Want to find out more? See page 22. The DJ starts as soon as you play keys in the accompaniment area of the keyboard. No. 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 Voice Name SAXOPHONE Soprano Sax Alto Sax Tenor Sax Breathy Tenor Baritone Sax Oboe English Horn Bassoon Clarinet TRUMPET Trumpet Muted Trumpet Trombone No. 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 Voice Name Trombone Section French Horn Tuba BRASS Brass Section Big Band Brass Mellow Horns Synth Brass Jump Brass Techno Brass FLUTE Flute Piccolo Pan Flute No. 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 Voice Name Recorder Ocarina SYNTH LEAD Square Lead Sawtooth Lead Voice Lead Star Dust Brightness Analogon Fargo SYNTH PAD Fantasia Bell Pad Xenon Pad No. 099 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 Voice Name Equinox Dark Moon PERCUSSION Vibraphone Marimba Xylophone Steel Drums Celesta Tubular Bells Timpani Music Box DRUM KITS Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 No. 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 Voice Name Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Analog Kit Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2 13 Quick Guide Step 2 Songs zx xq z GrandPno 001 092 001 xc r w Playing the Songs The PSR-292 is packed with a total of 100 songs, including one Demo song — which has been specially created to showcase the rich and dynamic sounds of the instrument. There are also 99 additional songs, designed to be used with the educational Lesson feature. You can also play songs loaded to the PSR via MIDI. The songs can be stored to song numbers 101-199. (See page 71.) Playing the Demo song Let’s play the Demo song now, Repeating with #001. z Start the Demo song. Playing a single song Naturally, you can also individually select and play back the PSR-292’s songs (001 - 205). z Press the [SONG] button. Just You Just You 001 You can also play back songs of other categories. Simply select the appropriate number of the desired song during playback. 001 x Select a song. x Stop the Demo song. or B Bailey • The PSR-292 also has a Demo and DJ Cancel function that allows you to disable Demo song and DJ function. Set Demo and DJ Cancel in the Function mode (page 76). ]/[ r • You can also select the appropriate category by using the [ buttons. f 002 or ] c Start (and stop) the song. Want to find out more? See page 51. 14 Step 2 Songs Recording Your Own Song Much like a multi-track tape recorder, the PSR-292 lets you play and record the individual parts of your own song in real time. q Select the desired User song (201 - 205) for recording. User 2 or the keyboard. The PSR-292 starts recording as soon as you play the first note on the keyboard. 202 • You can also select the appropriate category by using the [ ]/[ ] buttons. r To stop recording, press the [START/ r f e Start recording by playing a melody on STOP] button. w Simultaneously hold down the [REC] button and press the desired track number button ([1] - [5]). Want to find out more? See page 56. User 2 202 ● Song List No. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 Song Name Demo Just The Way You Are Favorites Bill Bailey (Won’t You Please Come Home) When Irish Eyes Are Smiling Down By The Riverside America The Beautiful When The Saints Go Marchin’ In Orchestra Frühlingsstimmen Danse Des Mirlitons From “The Nutcracker” “Orphée Aux Enfers” Ouverture Slavonic Dances No.10 La Primavera (From Le Quattro Stagioni) Méditation De Thais Guillaume Tell Camptown Races Frühlingslied Ungarische Tänze Nr.5 Pianist Dolly’s Dreaming And Awakening La Candeur Arabesque Pastorale Petite Réunion Innocence No. 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 Song Name Progrès Tarentelle La Chevaleresque Etude Op.10-3 “Chanson De L’adieu” Marcia Alla Turca Turkish March Valse Op.64-1 “Peiti Chien” Menuett Nocturne Op.9-2 Moments Musicaux Op.94-3 The Entertainer Prelude (Wohltemperierte Klavier 1-1) La Viollette Für Elise Practice Little Brown Jug Loch Lomond Oh! Susanna Greensleeves Aura Lee Londonderry Air Ring De Banjo Wenn Ich Ein Vöglein Wär ? Die Lorelei Funiculi-Funicula Turkey In The Straw Old Folks At Home Silent Night Jingle Bells No. 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 Song Name Muss I Denn Liebesträume Nr.3 Jesu, Joy Of Man’s Desiring Symphonie Nr.9 Song Of The Pearl Fisher Gavotte String Quartet No.17 2nd Mov. “Serenade” Menuett Canon The Danube Waves From “The Magic Flute” Piano Sonate Op.27-2 “Mondschein” “The Surprise” Symphony To A Wild Rose Air de Toréador “Carmen” O Mio Babbino Caro (From “Gianni Schicchi”) Duet Row Row Row Your Boat On Top Of Old Smoky We Wish You A Merry Christmas Scarborough Fair Im Mai O Christmas Tree Mary Had A Little Lamb Ten Little Indians Pop Goes The Weasel Twinkle Twinkle Little Star No. 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 Song Name Close Your Hands, Open Your Hands The Cuckoo O Du Lieber Augustin London Bridge Chord Lesson Twinkle Twinkle Little Star Close Your Hands, Open Your Hands The Cuckoo O Du Lieber Augustin London Bridge American Patrol Beautiful Dreamer Battle Hymn Of The Republic Home Sweet Home Valse Des Fleurs (From “The Nutcracker”) Aloha Oe I’ve Been Working On The Railroad My Darling Clementine Auld Lang Syne Grandfather’s Clock Amazing Grace My Bonnie Yankee Doodle Joy To The World Ave Maria 15 Quick Guide Step 3 Music Database x zb GrandPno 001 092 001 v z Music Database Here’s a convenient feature that lets you instantly reconfigure the PSR-292 for playing in different music styles. If you want to perform in a certain genre but don’t know what settings to make, simply select the genre from the Music Database — and the PSR292 makes all the right settings for you! Accompaniment area Left hand Auto accompaniment (for example, bass + guitar + drums) • For more infomation on playing proper chords for the auto accompaniment, see “Using Auto Accompaniment — Multi Fingering” on page 43 and “Looking up Chords in the Dictionary” on the next page. z Press the [M.D.B.] (MUSIC DATABASE) button. + Right hand Melody x Select a Music Database. Refer to the Music Database List on page 87. or Croco Rk 002 AlvFever 001 f 16 r • You can also select the appropriate category by using the [ ]/[ ] buttons. Step 3 Music Database Looking up Chords in the Dictionary The convenient Dictionary function teaches you how to play chords by showing you the individual notes. In the example below, we’ll learn how to play a GM7 chord... Keys for entering the chord (C1 – B2) Keys for entering the chord type (C3 – B4) Keys for entering the chord root (C5 – B5) Learning how to play a specific chord Example: c Specify the chord type of the chord (in this case, M7). v Play the notes of the chord as indicated in the keyboard diagram in the display. The chord name flashes when the chord is played properly. G M7 Root note Chord type z Press the [DICTIONARY] button. Chord area Dict. x Specify the root note of the chord (in this case, b To leave the Dictionary function, press the G). [DICTIONARY] button again Want to find out more? See page 45. c Play a chord with your left hand. The style starts as soon as you play the keyboard, letting you play the melody along with accompaniment. For more on chords, see “Looking up Chords in the Dictionary” above. Accompaniment area v Stop the style. Want to find out more? See page 48. 17 Panel Display Indications The PSR-292 features a large multi-function display that shows all important settings for the instrument. The section below briefly explains the various icons and indications in the display. q Notation r Song/Voice/Style/M.D.B. e Beat marks name and number !4 Octave indicator GrandPno 001 092 001 t y u i o Touch indicator Harmony indicator Dual indicator Split indicator Accompaniment On indicator !0 Sync Stop indicator !1 Measure and Tempo !2 Chord !3 Song track indicators w Keyboard q Notation / w Keyboard These two portions of the display conveniently indicate notes. When a song is being played back, they show the melody or chord notes in succession. When you play the keyboard yourself, the display shows the notes you play. • For a few specific chords, not all notes may be shown in the notation section of the display. This is due to space limitations in the display. e Beat marks These marks (one large, three small) flash in sequence and in time with the song or style. The large arrow indicates the first beat of the measure. r Song/Voice/Style/M.D.B. name and number This portion of the display indicates the name and number of the currently selected song, voice, style or M.D.B. It also displays the category name when using the category button, or the name and current setting/value of other functions, as well as other important operation messages. 18 t Touch indicator This appears when the Touch function is turned on. (See page 30.) y Harmony indicator This appears when the Harmony effect is turned on. (See page 31.) u Dual indicator This appears when the Dual function is turned on. (See page 26.) i Split indicator This appears when the Split function is turned on. (See page 27.) o Accompaniment On indicator This appears when the auto accompaniment is turned on. (See page 36.) Panel Display Indications !0 Sync Stop indicator This appears when the Sync Stop function is turned on. (See page 40.) !3 Song track indicators In song recording and playback, these indicate the status of the tracks. (See page 57.) !1 Measure and Tempo These show the current measure during playback of a song or style, and the currently set Tempo value for the song or style. !4 Octave indicator When note data exceeds the range limit of note display, the “8va” indication appears in the display. !2 Chord When a song (with chords) is being played back, this indicates the current chord root and type. It also indicates chords played in the ACMP area of the keyboard when the Style mode and auto accompaniment are on. Music Stand Insert the bottom edge of the included music stand into the slot located at the top rear of the PSR-292 control panel. 19 Portable Grand This convenient function lets you instantly call up the Grand Piano voice. Playing the Portable Grand Press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button. GrandPno 001 Doing this automatically selects the special “Stereo Sampled Piano” Grand Piano voice. Using the Metronome 1 Call up the Tempo setting. Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button. TEMPO 148 148 Current Tempo value 2 Change the value. Use the dial or numeric keypad to set the desired Tempo value, or use the [+]/[-] buttons to increase or decrease the value. or 20 Restoring the Default Tempo Value Each song and style has been given a default or standard Tempo setting. If you’ve changed the Tempo, you can instantly restore the default setting by pressing both [+]/[-] buttons simultaneously (when Tempo is selected). You can also restore the default Tempo easily by simultaneously holding the [TEMPO/TAP] button and moving the dial. Portable Grand 3 Turn on the Metronome. Press the [METRONOME] button. 148 1 Indicates the beat number in the measure. To turn the Metronome off, press the [METRONOME] button again. Setting the Metronome Time Signature The time signature of the Metronome can be set to various quarter-note based meters. The Time Signature can be set in the Function mode (page 76). Numeric keypad 01 02 03 04 : 15 0 Time signature 1/4 — Plays only “1” beats (all high clicks) 2/4 3/4 4/4 : 15/4 Plays no “1” beats (all low clicks) • The time signature changes automatically when a style or song is selected. Time Sig 04 Indicates current beat number. Adjusting the Metronome Volume You can adjust the volume of the Metronome sound in the Function mode (page 76). The volume range is 000 127. 21 DJ This exciting feature lets you instantly call up a dynamic DJ voice and style for playing contemporary dance music. Playing the DJ 1 Press the [DJ] button. • The PSR-292 has a Demo song and DJ Cancel function that allows you to disable Demo song and DJ function. Set Demo and DJ Cancel in the Function mode (page 76). DJ Set 1 000 Doing this automatically resets the entire instrument for playing the specially programmed DJ voice. 2 Play the DJ style. Play keys in the accompaniment area of the keyboard. • When the DJ style is selected, the accompaniment is triggered by only the root of the chord, letting you play with one finger. Accompaniment area 3 Play the DJ voices. Play the upper area of the keyboard. 4 Stop the DJ style. Accompaniment area (C1 – F#2) FX02 R Ohh2 ev er FX se TB rs O hh 1 Sc ra tc Sc h 1 ra tc h 3 ● For example, when 601 “DJ Set 1” is selected: 22 Jo H o ui h H u ue G a et U p G Sc ra o t Sc ch ra 2 Sc tch ra 4 tc h 5 C3 Playing Voices The PSR-292 features a total of 605 authentic voices — all of which have been created with Yamaha’s sophisticated AWM (Advanced Wave Memory) tone generation system. These include 480 XG voices and drum kits. The PSR-292 also has a Dual Voice or Split Voice function that lets you combine two different voices in a layer, or play from separate areas of the keyboard, play the two together across the keyboard. Playing a Voice 1 Press the [VOICE] button. Voice name and number GrandPno 001 Select the desired voice number. ] buttons, dial or the SELECT [ > ]/[ r ■ Use the CATEGORY [ [ ] buttons. f The categories of each voice and their numbers are shown on the panel. A complete voice list of the available voices is given on page 79. • Selecting the #000 OTS voice calls up a convenient feature — automatically selecting an appropriate voice to best match the current style or song. ]/ < r ● Select the voice CATEGORY Using the CATEGORY [ ]/[ ] button jumps through the voice numbers according to their category divisions. f 2 Category name GUITAR 23 ]/[ < ● Select the voice number Select a voice by using the dial or the SELECT [ > Playing Voices ] buttons. Jazz Gtr 032 ■ Use the numeric keypad. There are two ways to select voices: 1) directly entering the voice number with the numeric keypad, or 2) using the [+]/[-] buttons to step up and down through the voice numbers. ● Using the numeric keypad Enter the digits of the voice number as listed on page 79. For example, to select voice #109, press “1” on the numeric keypad, then “0”, “9.” For voice numbers beginning with zeroes (such as #042 or #006), the initial zeroes may be omitted. In this case, there is a short pause before the indication appears. Std.Kit1 109 ● Using the [+]/[-] buttons Press the [+] button to select the next voice number, and press the [-] button to select the previous voice. Holding down either button continuously scrolls up or down through the numbers. 24 • Each voice is automatically called up with the most suitable octave range setting. Thus, playing middle C with one voice may sound higher or lower than another voice at the same key. Playing Voices 3 Play the selected voice. Since either the Style, Song or M.D.B. mode is active in the background, you can also play styles, songs or M.D.B., respectively, in the Voice mode by simply pressing the [START/STOP] button. The last selected style, song or M.D.B. will be played. The following parameteres can be set in the Function mode (page 75). CATEGORY Main Voice SELECT Volume Octave Pan Reverb Send Level Chorus Send Level DSP Send Level Drum Kit Voice List (voices 109-120) When one of the 12 Drum Kit voices is selected, you can play different drum and percussion instrument sounds from the keyboard. • For more details, see page 88. No. 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 Name Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Analog Kit Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2 LCD Std.Kit1 Std.Kit2 Room Kit Rock Kit Elct.Kit AnlogKit DanceKit Jazz Kit BrushKit SymphKit SFX Kit1 SFX Kit2 ui ca Tr Mut ia ng e l Sh e M u ak er te C Br u sh Br Tap us h Sl ap C as ta ne St t ick s O pe n R im Sh Si ot de St ic H an k d C la p H i-H at C H i-H los ed at P H i-H eda l at O pe n C ra sh C R ym id e ba C ym l 1 ba Ta l1 m bo ur C ow ine be ll Vi br as la p Bo ng o L C on ga H O pe Ti m n ba le Ag L og o L M ar ac as G ui ro Sh C o la ve rt s ● For example, when 109 “Standard Kit 1” is selected: Br Br Se q C lic us k H us h S h Ta wir l p Sn Sw ar irl Sn e R Ba are oll ss H Ba Dr So ss um ft D ru Sof m t Ba Ha ss rd D ru Sn Sna m ar re e H M H Fl oo ar d r Fl To oo m rT L om Lo H w M To id m T M om id L To C H mH hi ig n h R ese To id C m e C ym y Sp mb bal la al C C sh C up ra sh ym ba C y R id mb l e C al 2 ym ba C Bo l 2 on ng ga o H H M C ute on Ti ga m L ba l Ag e H og o Sa C H m ba ab a Sa W sa h m ba istl W eH h G istle W uiro L oo L d on W Blo g oo ck d B H C loc ui ca k L Tr O ia ng pe n le O pe Ji ng n le Be Bel ll T l re e C3 25 Playing Voices #000 OTS This special “voice” is actually a convenient feature which automatically selects a suitable voice for you when you select a style. The voice is selected to best match the style or song you’ve called up. Select voice #000 (OTS). #000 OTS is selected. GrandPno or 000 Dual Voice The Dual Voice function lets you combine two different voices in a layer — one the Main voice, which is selected normally, and the other the Dual voice, which is selected in the Function mode (page 75). You can also set various parameters independently for these voices, such as giving them separate volume, octave, Pan, Reverb, Chorus, and DSP settings. This lets you create an optimum mix for the voices, and enhance the way they blend together. The following parameters can be set in the Function mode (page 75). CATEGORY Dual Voice SELECT Voice Volume Octave Pan Reverb Send Level Chorus Send Level DSP Send Level To turn the Dual Voice on or off, press the [DUAL] button. GrandPno 001 26 Indicates Dual Voice is on. Playing Voices Split Voice The Split Voice function lets you assign two different Voices to opposite areas of the keyboard, and play one Voice with your left hand while your right plays another. For example, you could play bass with the left hand and play piano with the right. The right-hand (or upper) Voice is selected in the Main Voice mode (page 23), and the left-hand (or lower) Voice is selected in the Function mode (page 75), along with the other Split Voice parameters shown below. The following parameters can be set in the Function mode (page 75). CATEGORY Split Voice SELECT Voice Volume Octave Pan Reverb Send Level Chorus Send Level DSP Send Level To turn the Split Voice on or off, press the [SPLIT] button. GrandPno Indicates Split Voice is on. 001 Setting the Split Point The Split Point determines the highest key for the split voice and sets the split point. Split Point Split Voice • This setting also affects the split point for the accompaniment area. Main Voice Split Point can be set in the Function mode (page 75). 27 Playing Voices One Touch Setting This convenient feature automatically selects the voice to best match the selected style — simply by pressing one of the two One Touch Setting buttons. Two types of One Touch Settings are available. For each style, you can create and store your own custom One Touch Settings. ● One Touch Setting Parameters Main Voice Voice Number Effect Volume Harmony Octave Pan Reverb Send Level Chorus Send Level DSP Send Level Dual Voice ON/Off Voice Number Volume Octave Pan Reverb Send Level Chorus Send Level DSP Send Level * Accompaniment is automatically set to on. Synchro Start is automatically set to on (when style is stopped). DSP Type On/Off Harmony Type Harmony Volume ■ Calling up a One Touch Setting. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 1 Select the style. or 2 Press the ONE TOUCH SETTING button [1] or [2]. OTS 2 28 • One Touch Setting does not function in the Song mode. Playing Voices ■ Creating and Storing a One Touch Setting. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • You can also create and store your own custom One Touch Settings for each of the styles. 1 Select the desired style. 2 Make the desired settings. Change the voice and make any other settings you want to use with the selected style and the One Touch Setting buttons. 3 Press and hold the [MEMORY] button then press the appropriate button — ONE TOUCH SETTING button [1] or [2]. WRITING! Restoring the Default One Touch Setting data Each One Touch Setting can be restored to its default. To do this, simply press and hold the appropriate One Touch Setting button, [1] or [2]. To restore both buttons to their defaults, simultaneously press and hold both the [1] and [2] buttons. Transpose and Tuning You can also adjust the tuning and change the transposition (key) of the entire PSR-292 sound with the Transpose and Tuning functions. ■ Transpose • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Transpose determines the key of both the main voice and the bass/chord accompaniment. It also determines the pitch of the songs. This allows you to easily match the pitch of the PSR-292 to other instruments or singers, or play in a different key without changing your fingering. The Transpose settings can be adjusted over a range of ± 12 semitones (± 1 octave). • The Transpose function has no effect on the Drum Kits voices (#109 - #120) and DJ voices (#601 - #605). Transpose can be set in the Function mode (page 75). ■ Tuning • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Tuning determines the fine pitch setting of both the main voice and the bass/chord accompaniment. It also determines the pitch of the songs. This allows you to accurately match the tuning with that of other instruments. The Tuning settings can be adjusted over a range of ± 100 (approx. ± 1 semitone). • The Tuning settings have no effect on the Drum Kit voices (#109 - #120). Tuning can be set in the Function mode (page 75). 29 Playing Voices Touch and Touch Sensitivity The Touch function gives you dynamic, expressive control over the voices, letting you determine how loud or soft the sound is by your playing strength. Turn the Touch function on or off as desired by pressing the [TOUCH] button. • To save the Touch on/off status and the Function parameters to internal memory (flash memory), press and hold the [FUNCTION] button. (See page 78.) Indicates Touch function is on. GrandPno 001 Touch Sensitivity lets you set how the PSR-292 responds to your playing strength, allowing you to customize the keyboard to suit your own playing style. The default Touch Sensitivity is 2 (Medium). Sensitivity can be set in the Function mode (page 75). ● Settings: 1 (Soft) 2 (Medium) 3 (Hard) This results in limited touch response, and produces a relatively narrow dynamic range, no matter how lightly or strongly you play the keys. This lets you play over a normal dynamic range (soft to loud). This is designed for playing very soft passages, giving you slightly more detailed control in the soft volume range. When Touch is turned off, a constant volume (corresponding to a velocity value of 80) is produced. 30 Effects The PSR-292 is equipped with a wide variety of effects that can be used to enhance the sound of the voices. The PSR-292 has four separate effect systems — Harmony, Reverb, Chorus and DSP — and each has many different effect types to choose from. Harmony The Harmony section features a variety of performance effects that enhance the melodies you play when using the accompaniment styles of the PSR-292. A total of twenty-six Harmony types are available. (See page 33.) Tremolo, Trill and Echo effects can be used even if accompaniment is off. There are five different Harmony Types that automatically create harmony parts (for notes played in the upper section of the keyboard) to match the accompaniment chords. • For the first five Harmony Types (Duet, Trio, Block, Country, and Octave), chords must be played in the Accompaniment area of the keyboard. The Harmony voice(s) change in pitch to best match the chords you play. • The speed of the Trill, Tremolo, and Echo effects depends on the Tempo setting (page 33). Turn on/off the Harmony effect. Press the [HARMONY] button. Indicates Harmony effect is on. GrandPno • Each voice of the PSR-292 has its own independent Harmony setting. 001 Harmony type and Harmony Volume (when Harmony Type 1 - 5 is selected) can be set in the Function mode (page 76). Reverb The Reverb effect reproduces the natural ambient “wash” of sound that occurs when a instrument is played in a room or concert hall. A total of eight different Reverb types simulating various different performance environments are available. (See page 33.) The following parameters can be set in the Function mode (pages 75, 76). CATEGORY Effect Main Voice Dual Voice Split Voice • Twelve additional Reverb Types are available when controlling the PSR-292 from a MIDI device. (For details, See page 92.) • Each style of the PSR-292 has its own independent Reverb setting. SELECT Reverb Type Reverb Send Level Reverb Send Level Reverb Send Level 31 Effects Chorus The Chorus effect lets you enhance the sound of the voices with the use of pitch modulation. Two basic types are provided: Chorus and Flanger. Chorus produces a thicker, warmer, and more animated sound, whereas Flanger creates a swirling, metallic effect. A total of four Chorus types are available. (See page 34.) The following parameters can be set in the Function mode (pages 75, 76). CATEGORY Effect Main Voice Dual Voice Split Voice SELECT Chorus Type Chorus Send Level Chorus Send Level Chorus Send Level DSP The DSP effect section provides distortion and chorus effects, plus a wealth of other useful and dynamic effects for enhancing and changing the sound of the voices. Included among these miscellaneous effects are reverse gate reverb, phaser, rotary speaker, tremolo, echo, delay, distortion, equalization, and wah. A total of thirty-eight DSP types are available. (See page 34.) The following parameters can be set in the Function mode (pages 75, 76). CATEGORY Effect Main Voice Dual Voice Split Voice 32 SELECT DSP Type DSP Send Level DSP Send Level DSP Send Level • Each voice of the PSR-292 has its own independent DSP setting. • Fifty-one additional DSP Types are available when controlling the PSR-292 from a MIDI device. (For details, see page 92.) Effects ■ Effect Types ● Harmony Types No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Harmony Type Duet Trio Block Country Octave Trill 1/4 note Display Name Duet Trio Block Country Octave Tril1/4 7 Trill 1/6 note Tril1/6 8 Trill 1/8 note Tril1/8 9 Trill 1/12 note Tril1/12 10 Trill 1/16 note Tril1/16 11 Trill 1/24 note Tril1/24 12 Trill 1/32 note Tril1/32 13 Tremolo 1/4 note Trem1/4 14 Tremolo 1/6 note Trem1/6 15 Tremolo 1/8 note Trem1/8 16 Tremolo 1/12 note Trem1/12 17 Tremolo 1/16 note Trem1/16 18 Tremolo 1/24 note Trem1/24 19 Tremolo 1/32 note Trem1/32 20 Echo 1/4 note Echo1/4 21 Echo 1/6 note Echo1/6 22 Echo 1/8 note Echo1/8 23 Echo 1/12 note Echo1/12 24 Echo 1/16 note Echo1/16 25 Echo 1/24 note Echo1/24 26 Echo 1/32 note Echo1/32 Description Harmony types 1 - 5 are pitch-based and add one-, two- or threenote harmonies to the single-note melody played in the right hand. These types only sound when chords are played in the auto accompaniment area of the keyboard. 3 3 Types 6 - 26 are rhythm-based effects and add embellishments or delayed repeats in time with the auto accompaniment. These types sound whether the auto accompaniment is on or not; however, the actual speed of the effect depends on the Tempo setting (page 41). The individual note values in each type let you synchronize the effect precisely to the rhythm. Triplet settings are also available: 1/6 = quarter-note triplets, 1/12 = eighth-note triplets, 1/24 = sixteenthnote triplets. • The Trill effect Types (6 - 12) create two-note trills (alternating notes) when two notes are held. 3 • The Tremolo effect Types (13 - 19) repeat all held notes (up to four). • The Echo effect Types (20 - 26) create delayed repeats of each note played. 3 3 3 3 3 3 ● Reverb Types No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Reverb Type Hall 1 Hall 2 Room 1 Room 2 Stage 1 Stage 2 Plate 1 Plate 2 Off Display Name Hall1 Hall1 Room1 Room2 Stage1 Stage2 Plate1 Plate2 Off Description Concert hall reverb. Small room reverb. Reverb for solo instruments. Simulated steel plate reverb. No effect. 33 Effects ● Chorus Types No. 1 2 3 4 5 Chorus Type Chorus 1 Chorus 2 Flanger 1 Flanger 2 Off Display Name Chorus1 Chorus2 Flanger1 Flanger2 Off Description Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing. Pronounced three-phase modulation with a slight metallic sound. No effect. ● DSP Types 34 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 DSP Type Hall 1 Hall 2 Room 1 Room 2 Stage 1 Stage 2 Plate 1 Plate 2 Early Reflection 1 Early Reflection 2 Gate Reverb Display Name Hall1 Hall2 Room1 Room2 Stage1 Stage2 Plate1 Plate2 ER1 ER2 Gate1 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Reverse Gate Chorus 1 Chorus 2 Flanger 1 Flanger 2 Symphonic Phaser Rotary Speaker 1 Rotary Speaker 2 Tremolo 1 Tremolo 2 Guitar Tremolo Auto Pan Gate2 Chorus1 Chorus2 Flanger1 Flanger2 Symphony Phaser Rotary1 Rotary2 Tremolo1 Tremolo2 Guitar Tremolo AutoPan 25 26 AutoWah DelayLCR 27 28 29 Auto Wah Delay Left - Center Right Delay Left - Right Echo Cross Delay DelayLR Echo CrossDly 30 31 32 33 34 35 Karaoke Distortion Hard Distortion Soft Overdrive Amp Simulation EQ Disco Karaoke D Hard D Soft Overdrv AmpSimu EQ Disco 36 EQ Telephone EQ Tel 37 38 39 3Band EQ 2Band EQ No Effect 3BandEQ 2BandEQ Off Description Concert hall reverb. Small room reverb. Reverb for solo instruments. Simulated steel plate reverb. Early reflections only. Gated reverb effect, in which the reverberation is quickly cut off for special effects. Similar to Gate Reverb, but with a reverse increase in reverb. Conventional chorus effect with rich, warm chorusing. Pronounced three-phase modulation with slight metallic sound. Exceptionally rich & deep chorusing. Pronounced, metallic modulation with periodic phase change. Rotary speaker simulation. Rich Tremolo effect with both volume and pitch modulation. Simulated electric guitar tremolo. Several panning effects that automatically shift the sound position (left, right, front, back). Repeating filter sweep “wah” effect. Three independent delays, for the left, right and center stereo positions. Initial delay for each stereo channel, and two separate feedback delays. Stereo delay, with independent feedback level settings for each channel. Complex effect that sends the delayed repeats “bouncing” between the left and right channels. Deep, pronounced echo effect. Hard-edged, warm distortion. Soft, warm distortion. Natural distortion, like that of an overdriven amplifier. Characteristic sound of a guitar amplifier/speaker. Equalizer effect that boosts both high and low frequencies, as is typical in most disco music. Equalizer effect that cuts both high and low frequencies, to simulate the sound heard through a telephone receiver. Equalizer with three separate frequency bands. Equalizer with two separate frequency bands. No effect Selecting and Playing Styles The PSR-292 provides dynamic rhythm/accompaniment patterns (styles) — as well as voice settings appropriate for each style — for various popular musical categories. A total of 135 different styles are available, in several different categories. Each style is made up of separate “sections” — Intro, Main A and B, and Ending — letting you call up different accompaniment sections as you perform. The auto accompaniment features that are built into the rhythms add the excitement of instrumental backing to your performance, letting you control the accompaniment by the chords you play. Auto accompaniment effectively splits the keyboard into two areas: The upper is used for playing a melody line, and the lower (set by default to keys F#2 and lower) is for the auto accompaniment function. The PSR-292 also features the convenient Dictionary function (page 45). Dictionary provides you with a builtin “chord encyclopedia” that teaches you how to play any chord you specify by showing you the appropriate notes in the display. Selecting a Style 1 Press the [STYLE] button. Style name and number 8BtModrn 001 Select the desired style number. The categories of each styles and their numbers are shown on the panel. A complete style list of the available styles is given on page 86. < > r ■ Use the dial. You can also use the CATEGORY and/or SELECT buttons. Turn the dial and select the desired style. Select the appropriate category by using the CATEGORY [ ]/[ ] buttons. When you come close to the desired number, use the SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons to step down and up through the style numbers. f 2 35 Selecting and Playing Styles ■ Use the numeric keypad. Style numbers can be selected in the same way as with the voices (page 24). You can use the numeric keypad to directly enter the style number, or use the [+]/[-] buttons to step up and down through the styles. Playing the Styles The panel buttons below function as style controls. Pressing this button alternately enables and cancels the bass and chord accompaniment. (See below.) Pressing this button alternately enables and cancels the Sync Start function. (See page 37.) Pressing this button alternately enables and cancels the Sync Stop function. (See page 40.) 1 Pressing this button switches between the Main A and Main B sections, automatically adding a fill-in pattern before changing the section. (See page 42.) This controls the Intro and Ending sections. (See pages 38, 39.) Pressing this button alternately starts and stops style playback. Turn on the auto accompaniment. Press the [ACMP] button to turn on (enable) the auto accompaniment. 8BtModrn 001 Indicates that auto accompaniment is on. 36 Selecting and Playing Styles 2 Start the style. You can do this in one of the following ways: ■ Pressing the [START/STOP] button The rhythm starts playing immediately without bass and chord accompaniment. The currently selected Main A or B section will play. You can select the Main A or B section by pressing the appropriate button — [MAIN A/B] — before pressing the [START/STOP] button. (The display briefly shows the letter of the selected section: “MAIN A” or “MAIN B.”) Indicates selected section (Main A or B). MAIN A ■ Using Tap Tempo to Start This useful feature lets you tap out the speed (tempo) of the style and automatically start the style at that tapped speed. Simply tap the [TEMPO/TAP] button four times (or three times for a 3/4 time style), and the style starts automatically at the tempo you tapped. You can also change the tempo while the style is playing by tapping the [TEMPO/TAP] button twice at the desired tempo. ■ Using Sync Start The PSR-292 also has a Sync Start function that allows you to start the style by simply pressing a key on the keyboard. To use Sync Start, first press the [SYNC START] button (the beat marks all flash to indicate Sync Start standby), then press any key on the keyboard. (When auto accompaniment is on, play a key or chord in the auto accompaniment area of the keyboard.) Auto accompaniment area 37 Selecting and Playing Styles Starting with an Intro section Each style has its own two- or four-measure Intro section. When used with the auto accompaniment, many of the Intro sections also include special chord changes and embellishments to enhance your performance. To start with an Intro section: 1) Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button — to select which section (A or B) is to follow the Intro. Indicates selected section (Main A or B). MAIN A 2) Press the [INTRO ENDING] button. Indicates Intro standby. INTRO≥A To actually start the Intro section, press the [START/STOP] button. Using Sync Start with an Intro section You can also use the Sync Start function with the special Intro section of the selected style. To use Sync Start with an Intro section: 1) Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button — to select which section (A or B) is to follow the Intro. Indicates selected section (MAIN A or B). MAIN A 2) Press the [INTRO ENDING] button. Indicates Intro standby. INTRO≥A 3) Press the [SYNC START] button to enable Sync Start, and start the Intro section and accompaniment by playing any key on the keyboard. (When auto accompaniment is on, play a key or chord in the auto accompaniment area of the keyboard.) Auto accompaniment area 38 Selecting and Playing Styles 3 Change chords using the auto accompaniment feature. Try playing a few successive chords with your left hand, and notice how the bass and chord accompaniment change with each chord you play. (Refer to page 43 for more information on how to use auto accompaniment.) • The [ACMP] button can also be used to turn off and on the bass/ chord accompaniment while playing — allowing you to create dynamic rhythmic breaks in your performance. • Chords played in the auto accompaniment area of the keyboard are also detected and played when the style is stopped. In effect, this gives you a “split keyboard,” with bass and chords in the left hand and the normally selected voice in the right. 4 Stop the style. You can do this in one of three ways: ■ Pressing the [START/STOP] button The style stops playing immediately. ■ Using an Ending section Press the [INTRO ENDING] button. The style stops after the Ending section is finished. • To have the Ending section gradually slow down (ritardando) as it is playing, press the [INTRO ENDING] button twice quickly. END/rit. ENDING ■ Pressing the [SYNC START] button This immediately stops the style and automatically enables Sync Start, letting you restart the style by simply playing a chord or key in the auto accompaniment area of the keyboard. 39 Selecting and Playing Styles Sync Stop This convenient feature lets you stop (or pause) the style by releasing your fingers from the auto accompaniment area of the keyboard. Playing the chord again restarts the style. This is ideal for putting dynamic breaks in your performance — for example, stopping the rhythm and accompaniment briefly while you play a melodic break or solo with your right hand. 1 Press the [ACMP] button. To turn accompaniment on. 8BtModrn 001 Indicates that auto accompaniment is on. 2 Press the [SYNC STOP] button. Setting Sync Stop to on before starting the style automatically sets Sync Start to on as well. 8BtModrn 001 Indicates that Sync Stop is on. 3 Play a chord on the keyboard (in the auto accompaniment area of the keyboard). The style starts as soon as you play a chord. 4 5 6 Stop the style by releasing the chord. To start the style again, play a chord. To turn Sync Stop off, press the [SYNC STOP] button again. To stop the style completely, press the [START/STOP] button. 40 Selecting and Playing Styles Changing the Tempo The tempo of style playback can be adjusted over a range of 32 - 280 bpm (beats per minute). 1 Call up the Tempo setting. Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button. TEMPO 120 • When style playback is stopped and a different style is selected, the tempo returns to the default setting of the new style. When switching styles during playback, the last tempo setting is maintained. (This allows you to keep the same tempo, even when changing styles.) 120 Current Tempo value 2 Change the value. Use the dial or numeric keypad to set the desired Tempo value, or use the [+]/[-] buttons to increase or decrease the value. or Restoring the Default Tempo Value Each song and style has been given a default or standard Tempo setting. If you’ve changed the Tempo, you can instantly restore the default setting by pressing both [+]/[-] buttons simultaneously (when Tempo is selected). You can also restore the default Tempo easily by simultaneously holding the [TEMPO/TAP] button and moving the dial. • You can also use the convenient Tap Tempo function to change the tempo by “tapping” a new one in real time. (See page 37.) 41 Selecting and Playing Styles Accompaniment Sections (Main A/B and Fill-ins) While the style is playing, you can add variation in the rhythm/accompaniment by pressing the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button. This switches between the Main A and Main B sections, automatically playing a fill-in pattern to smoothly lead into the next section. For example, if the Main A section is currently playing, pressing this button automatically plays a fill-in pattern, followed by the Main B section. (See illustration below.) You can also select either the Main A or B section to start by pressing the [MAIN/ AUTO FILL] button before starting the style. • Rhythm sounds and fill-in sections are not available when one of the Pianist styles (#124 - #135) are selected. This appears while the fill-in pattern is playing. Fill A≥B About the Fill-in Patterns If you press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button before beat 4... ...a fill-in pattern plays immediately until the end of the measure... 1st measure beat 1 2 3 4 If you press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button here, after beat 4... ...and the Main A or B section begins here. 2nd measure 1 2 3 4 ...a fill-in pattern plays from here... 3rd measure 1 2 3 ...and the Main A or B section begins here. Adjusting the Style Volume The playback volume of the style can be adjusted in the Function mode (page 76). This volume control affects only the Style volume. The volume range is 000 127. 42 • Style Volume cannot be changed unless the Style mode is active. Selecting and Playing Styles Using Auto Accompaniment — Multi Fingering When it is set to on (page 36), the auto accompaniment function automatically generates bass and chord accompaniment for you to play along with, by using Multi Fingering operation. You can change the chords of the accompaniment by playing keys in the auto accompaniment area of the keyboard using either the “Single Finger” or “Fingered” method. With Single Finger you can simply play a one-, two- or three-finger chord indication (see Single Finger Chords below). The Fingered technique is that of conventionally playing all the notes of the chord. Whichever method you use, the PSR-292 “understands” what chord you indicate and then automatically generates the accompaniment. ■ Single Finger Chords • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Chords that can be produced in Single Finger operation are major, minor, seventh and minor seventh. The illustration shows how to produce the four chord types. (The key of C is used here as an example; other keys follow the same rules. For example, Bb7 is played as Bb and A.) C Cm To play a major chord: Press the root note of the chord. C7 To play a minor chord: Press the root note together with the nearest black key to the left of it. Cm 7 To play a seventh chord: Press the root note together with the nearest white key to the left of it. To play a minor seventh chord: Press the root note together with the nearest white and black keys to the left of it (three keys altogether). ■ Fingered Chords • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Using the key of C as an example, the chart below shows the types of chords that can be recognized in the Fingered mode. ● Example for “C” chords CmM 7 CmM 7 (9) ( ) ( ( C (b5) CM7 b5 Cm 7 (9) Cm 7 (11) ) CM 7 aug CM7 (#11) ( Caug ) Csus 4 CM 7 (9) CM 7 ) C6 ) C (9) ( C 6 (9) C Cm (9) Cm 6 Cm 7 Cm 7 b5 CmM 7 b5 Cdim Cdim 7 C7 C 7 (13) C 7 (#9) C 7 b5 C 7 aug C 7 sus4 ) ) ) ) ( ( ( ( ) ) C 7 (b13) ( ( ) ( ( ) ( C 7 (b9) ) ) ( ) ( C 7 (#11) C 7 (9) ( ( ) ) ( ) Cm C 1+2+5 * Notes enclosed in parentheses are optional; the chords will be recognized without them. 43 Selecting and Playing Styles Chord Name/[Abbreviation] Normal Voicing Chord (C) Display Major [M] 1-3-5 C C Add ninth [(9)] 1-2-3-5 C(9) C(9) Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6 C6 C6 Sixth ninth [6(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 C6(9) C6(9) Major seventh [M7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 1 - (3) - 5 - 7 CM7 CM7 Major seventh ninth [M7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 CM7(9) CM7(9) Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7(#11)] 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - 7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - 7 CM7(#11) CM7(#11) 1 - 3 - b5 C(b5) Flatted fifth [(b5)] 44 Cb5 Major seventh flatted fifth [M7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - 7 CM7b5 CM7b5 Suspended fourth [sus4] 1-4-5 Csus4 Csus4 Augmented [aug] 1 - 3 - #5 Caug Caug Major seventh augmented [M7aug] 1 - (3) - #5 - 7 CM7aug CM7aug Minor [m] 1 - b3 - 5 Cm Cm Minor add ninth [m(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - 5 Cm(9) Cm(9) Minor sixth [m6] 1 - b3 - 5 - 6 Cm6 Cm6 Minor seventh [m7] 1 - b3 - (5) - b7 Cm7 Cm7 Minor seventh ninth [m7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - b7 Cm7(9) Cm7(9) Minor seventh add eleventh [m7(11)] 1 - (2) - b3 - 4 - 5 - (b7) Cm7(11) Cm7(11) Minor major seventh [mM7] 1 - b3 - (5) - 7 CmM7 CmM7 Minor major seventh ninth [mM7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - 7 CmM7(9) CmM7(9) Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - b7 Cm7b5 Cm7b5 Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - 7 CmM7b5 CmM7b5 Diminished [dim] 1 - b3 - b5 Cdim Cdim Diminished seventh [dim7] 1 - b3 - b5 - 6 Cdim7 Cdim7 Seventh [7] 1 - 3 - (5) - b7 or 1 - (3) - 5 - b7 C7 C7 Seventh flatted ninth [7(b9)] 1 - b2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7(b9) C7(b9) Seventh add flatted thirteenth [7(b13)] 1 - 3 - 5 - b6 - b7 C7(b13) C7(b13) Seventh ninth [7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7(9) C7(9) Seventh add sharp eleventh [7(#11)] 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - b7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - b7 C7(#11) C7(#11) Seventh add thirteenth [7(13)] 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - b7 C7(13) C7(13) Seventh sharp ninth [7(#9)] 1 - #2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7(#9) C7(#9) Seventh flatted fifth [7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - b7 C7b5 C7b5 Seventh augmented [7aug] 1 - 3 - #5 - b7 C7aug C7aug Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] 1 - 4 - (5) - b7 C7sus4 C7sus4 One plus two plus five [1+2+5] 1-2-5 C1+2+5 C • Notes in parentheses can be omitted. • Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompaniment based only on the root. • A perfect fifth (1 + 5) produces accompaniment based only on the root and fifth which can be used with both major and minor chords. • The chord fingerings listed are all in “root” position, but other inversions can be used — with the following exceptions: m7, m7b5, 6, m6, sus4, aug, dim7, 7b5, 6(9), 1+2+5. • Inversion of the 7sus4 and m7(11) chords are not recognized if the notes shown in parentheses are omitted. • The auto accompaniment will sometimes not change when related chords are played in sequence (e.g. some minor chords followed by the minor seventh). • Two-note fingerings will produce a chord based on the previously played chord. Selecting and Playing Styles Dictionary The Dictionary function is essentially a built-in “chord book” that shows you the individual notes of chords. It is ideal when you know the name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to play it. 1 Press the [DICTIONARY] button. Dict. 2 Specify the root of the chord. Press the key on the keyboard that corresponds to the desired chord root (as printed on the panel). Dict. Pressing this key selects the root G. 3 Specify the type of the chord (major, minor, seventh, etc.). Press the key on the keyboard that corresponds to the desired chord type (as printed on the panel). • For a few specific chords, not all notes may be shown in the notation section of the display. This is due to space limitations in the display. • You can also show the inversion of chord when using [+]/[-] button. Notation of chord Dict. Chord name (root and type) Pressing this key selects the major seventh chord type (M7). Individual notes of chord (keyboard) 45 Selecting and Playing Styles 4 Play the chord. Play the chord (as indicated in the display) in the chord area of the keyboard. The chord name flashes in the display when the correct notes are held down. (Inversions for many of the chords are also recognized.) Dict. Indicates notes to be played. Flashes when correct notes are held. To leave the Dictionary function, press the [DICTIONARY] button again. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • What is a Chord? • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • The simple answer: Three or more notes played simultaneously is a chord. (Two notes played together is an “interval” — an interval being the distance between two different notes. This is also referred to as a “harmony.”) Depending on the intervals between the three or more notes, a chord can sound beautiful or muddy and dissonant. The organization of notes in the example at left — a triad chord — produces a pleasant, harmonious sound. Triads are made up of three notes and are the most basic and common chords in most music. In this triad, the lowest note is the “root.” The root is the most important note in the chord, because it anchors the sound harmonically by determining its “key” and forms the basis for how we hear the other notes of the chord. The second note of this chord is four semitones higher than the first, and the third is three semitones higher than the second. Keeping our root note fixed and changing these notes by a semitone up or down (sharp or flat), we can create four different chords. Major chord (ex. C) Minor 3rd Major 3rd Minor chord (ex. Cm) Major 3rd Minor 3rd Augmented chord (ex. Caug) Diminished chord (ex. Cdim) Major 3rd Minor 3rd Major 3rd Minor 3rd Keep in mind that we can also change the “voicing” of a chord — for example, change the order of the notes (called “inversions”), or play the same notes in different octaves — without changing the basic nature of the chord itself. Inversion examples for the key of C G E C 46 C G E E C G Selecting and Playing Styles Beautiful sounding harmonies can be built in this manner. The use of intervals and chords is one of the most important elements in music. A wide variety of emotions and feelings can be created depending on the types of chords used and the order in which they are arranged. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Writing Chord Names • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Knowing how to read and write chord names is an easy yet invaluable skill. Chords are often written in a kind of shorthand that makes them instantly recognizable (and gives you the freedom to play them with the voicing or inversion that you prefer). Once you understand the basic principles of harmony and chords, it’s very simple to use this shorthand to write out the chords of a song. First, write the root note of the chord in an uppercase letter. If you need to specify sharp or flat, indicate that to the right of the root. The chord type should be indicated to the right as well. Examples for the key of C are shown below. Major chord Minor chord Augmented chord Diminished chord C Cm Caug Cdim For simple major chords, the type is omitted. One important point: Chords are made up of notes “stacked” on top of each other, and the stacked notes are indicated in the chord name of the chord type as a number — the number being the distance of the note from the root. (See the keyboard diagram below.) For example, the minor 6th chord includes the 6th note of the scale, the major 7th chord has the 7th note of the scale, etc. The Intervals of the Scale Dominant 7th (flatted 7th) To better understand the intervals and the numbers used to represent them in the chord name, study this diagram of the C major scale: C D E F G A B C D E F Root 2nd Other Chords Csus4 5th C7 4th 4th 3rd Dominant 7th Cm7bb5 7th 6th 5th 11th 9th Octave Cm7 Major chord Dominant 7th Cm6 C(9) CM7 Minor chord 7th Major chord Cdim7 * Bbb = A Dominant 7th Diminished chord Minor chord 6th 9th Diminished 7th (double flatted 7th) Diminished chord 47 Using the Music Database If you want to play in a certain genre of music but don’t know which style and voice settings would be appropriate, simply select the desired genre from the Music Database. The PSR-292 automatically makes all appropriate panel settings to let you play in that music style! 1 Press the [M.D.B.] (MUSIC DATABASE) button. The MUSIC DATABASE menu appears in the display. AlvFever 001 2 Select a Music Database. The categories of each Music Database and their numbers are shown on the panel. A complete list of the available styles in the Music Database is given on page 87. < r > f ■ Use the dial. You can also use the CATEGORY and/or SELECT buttons. Turn the dial and select the Music Database. Select the appropriate category by using the CATEGORY [ ]/[ ] buttons. When you come close to the desired number, use the SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons to step down and up through the Music Database numbers. XmasWalz 208 ■ Use the numeric keypad. Music Database numbers can be selected in the same way as with the voices (page 24). You can use the numeric keypad to directly enter the Music Database number, or use the [+]/[-] buttons to step up and down through the Music Database. 48 • Press the [M.D.B.] (MUSIC DATABASE) button to automatically set the Style mode, turn AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT on, and turn SYNCHRONIZED START on. See page 37 for details. Using the Music Database In this example, we will select #208 “Xmas Walz” and play the Song “Silent Night”. Auto accompaniment area 3 Play the chords with your left hand and the melody lines with your right hand along with the music. As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the style starts. For information on how to enter chords, see “Multi Fingering” on page 43. 4 • See pages 35 through 44 for details about the Style. When you reach the point in the music indicated by the arrow above, press the [ENDING] button. The style plays an ending phrase in ritardando. When the ending is finished, the style automatically stops. You can also stop the style by using the [STOP] button. 49 Using the Music Database Data stored by the Music Database Each of the Music Database settings has been specially programmed to match the selected musical style and each features the best suited voice (or combination of voices), style and other settings. Pressing the [M.D.B.] (MUSIC DATABASE) button and selecting a number lets you instantly reconfigure all relevant settings, conveniently allowing you to start playing in the desired genre with all the appropriate sounds — without having to make each setting one by one. ● M.D.B. Parameters Style Main Voice Dual Voice Style Number Accompaniment Split Point MainA/MainB Style Volume Voice Number Volume Octave Pan Reverb Send Level Chorus Send Level DSP Send Level ON/Off Voice Number Volume Octave Pan Reverb Send Level Chorus Send Level DSP Send Level Split Voice Effect Harmony Transpose Tempo * Accompaniment is automatically set to on. Synchro Start is automatically set to on (when style is stopped). 50 ON/Off Voice Number Volume Octave Pan Reverb Send Level Chorus Send Level DSP Send Level Split Point Reverb Type Chorus Type DSP Type On/Off Harmony Type Harmony Volume Transpose Tempo Selecting and Playing Songs The PSR-292 features a total of 105 songs. These include 100 songs that showcase the rich and dynamic sounds of the instrument, and 99 of these songs can be used with the educational Lesson feature (page 61), a powerful tool that makes learning songs fun and easy. A special Demo song has also been included, and can be played automatically by pressing the [DEMO] button. Moreover, there are five special User songs to which you can record your own performance. The User songs are “empty” and cannot be played until something has been recorded to them. (For instructions on recording your own songs, see page 56.) You can also transfer song data from your computer to the PSR-292 for playback. For details, see page 71. ● Song Playback Display These display the notes and name of the current chord. Babbino 066 Current measure number 120 012 Indicates the tracks currently playing back. (These can be alternately muted and sounded during playback by pressing the corresponding SONG MEMORY buttons.) About the Beat Display The arrow marks in the beat display flash in time with the rhythm of the song or style. The first arrow indicates the first beat of the measure, and the others flash in sequence. First beat of measure Second beat Third beat Fourth beat Selecting a Song 1 Press the [SONG] button. Song name and number Just You 001 51 Selecting and Playing Songs 2 Select the desired song number. The categories of each song and their numbers are shown on the panel. A complete list of the available songs is given on page 15. < > r f ■ Use the dial. You can also use the CATEGORY and/or SELECT buttons. Turn the dial and select the desired song. Select the appropriate category by using the CATEGORY [ ]/[ ] buttons. When you come close to the desired number, use the SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons to step down and up through the song numbers. ■ Use the numeric keypad. Song numbers can be selected in the same way as with the voices (page 24). You can use the numeric keypad to directly enter the song number, or use the [+]/[-] buttons to step up and down through the song. Listening to the Flash Memory Song The PSR-292 can play a song loaded into its internal flash memory. To do this, you’ll need to connect the PSR-292 to a personal computer, and use the “Song Filer” software to transmit the song from the computer. For more information on Flash songs and Song Filer, refer to page 71. Select the song number 101-199 using the dial or numeric keypad in the same way as preset songs. 52 Selecting and Playing Songs Playing the Songs The Panel buttons below function as Song controls. Turns on the A-B Repeat function (page 54). Pauses playback. Reverses the playback position. Starts and stops song playback. Advances the playback position. About the Song Tracks ● Song track indicators Melody tracks Style track Indicates track is enabled for playing Indicates track is muted or contains no data Track 2 generally contents data for the left hand. The “A” track contents Style (accompaniment) data. Track 1 generally contents data for the right hand. 1 Start the selected song. Press the [START/STOP] button. As the song plays back, the measure number and chords are shown in the display. 2 • You can play along with the song using the currently selected voice, or even select a different voice for playing along. Simply call up the Voice mode while the song is playing back and select the desired voice. (See page 23.) Stop the song. Press the [START/STOP] button. If playback was started by pressing the [START/STOP] button, the selected song stops automatically. 53 Selecting and Playing Songs A-B Repeat The convenient A-B Repeat function is an ideal aid for practicing and learning. It allows you to specify a phrase of a song (between point A and point B) and repeat it — while you play or practice along with it. 1 While playing a song, set point A (the start point). During playback, press the [A-B REPEAT] button once, at the beginning point to be repeated. • The A and B points can only be specified at the beginning of a measure (beat 1), and not at any point in the middle of a measure. • To set the A point to the beginning of a song, press the [A-B REPEAT] button before starting playback. REPEAT A- 2 006 006 Set point B (the end point). As the song continues playing, press the [A-B REPEAT] button once again, at the ending point to be repeated. The selected phrase repeats indefinitely until stopped. REPEAT A-b 3 012 012 Pause or stop playback as needed. Use the [PAUSE] button or [START/STOP] button. Stopping playback does not cancel the set A/B points or the A-B Repeat function. 4 Turn off the A-B Repeat function. Press the [A-B REPEAT] button. 54 • If you’re repeat practicing a particularly difficult section, try slowing down the Tempo to an appropriate speed to make it easier to play and master the part. You may also want to slow down the Tempo while setting the A and B points; this makes it easier to accurately set the points. • You can also set the A-B Repeat function when the song is stopped. Simply use the [REW r] and [FF f] buttons to select the desired measures, pressing the [A-B REPEAT] button for each point, then start playback. Selecting and Playing Songs Melody Voice Change The PSR-292 lets you play a melody on the keyboard along with each of the songs, either with the original melody voice or one of your own selection. The convenient Melody Voice Change feature takes this one step further — it lets you replace the original voice used for the melody of the song with the panel voice of your own selection. For example, if the current voice selected on the panel is piano but the song’s melody is being played by a flute voice, using Melody Voice Change will change the flute melody voice to piano. 1 Select the desired song. Press the [SONG] button, then use the dial , numeric keypad or [+]/[-] buttons to select the desired song. (See page 51.) 2 Select the desired voice. Press the [VOICE] button, then use the dial , numeric keypad or [+]/[-] buttons to select the desired voice. (See page 23.) 3 Press and hold down the [VOICE] button for at least one second. “MELODY VOICE CHANGE” appears in the display, indicating that the selected panel voice has replaced the song’s original melody voice. MELODY V Adjusting the Song Volume The playback volume of the song can be adjusted in the Function mode (page 76). This volume control affects only the Song volume. The volume range is 000 127. • Song Volume cannot be changed unless the Song mode is active. (This function becomes Style Volume when the Style mode is active.) 55 Song Recording The PSR-292 features powerful and easy-to-use song recording features that let you record your keyboard performances — using up to six independent tracks (including one track for accompaniment) — for creating your own complete, fully orchestrated compositions. You can record and save up to five User songs. User 1 rEC Song recording on the PSR-292 is similar to using a tape recorder; whatever you play on the keyboard is recorded in real time as you play it. Also, when you record subsequent parts to other tracks, you can hear the previously recorded parts as you record new ones. 001 Song Memory Capacity • Maximum number of notes : approximately 10,000 (when only “melody” tracks are recorded) • Maximum number of chords : approximately 5,500 (when only the chord track is recorded) Recording a User Song Data that can be recorded to the normal (melody) tracks: • Note on/off • Chorus Type* • Velocity • DSP Type* • Voice Number • Sustain • Reverb Type* • Tempo*, Time Signature* (if there is no such data in the Chord track) Data that can be recorded to the Chord track: • Style number* • Chord changes and timing • Changing sections (Intro, Main A/B, etc.) • Style Volume* • Tempo, Time Signature* * These settings can only be recorded once at the beginning of a song; other settings can be changed in the middle of a song. 1 Make all desired PSR-292 settings. Before you actually start recording, you’ll need to make various settings for the song — such as selecting a style, setting the Tempo, and selecting a voice. (See pages 35, 41, and 23.) • When using a Split Voice for recording, the voice assigned to the left of the split point cannot be recorded. If desired, also make other settings. Refer to the list above for settings that can be recorded to a song. Using the Metronome You can use the Metronome instead of a style if desired. This allows you to keep your performance “in time,” even when recording without style. To do this, press the [METRONOME] button before recording in step #4 below. After the song is completely recorded, simply play back the song with the Metronome turned off. (See page 20.) 56 Song Recording 2 Select a User song number for recording. Use the dial or numeric keypad to select the desired song: 201 - 205. If no song is manually selected, the PSR-292 automatically selects the first available empty song number. User 2 or 202 3 Select a track number for recording. While holding down the [REC] button, press the appropriate SONG MEMORY button. User 2 rEC • Keep in mind that all recording operations “replace” the data. In other words, if you record to a track that already has recorded data, all previous data in the track will be erased and replaced by the newly recorded data. 001 ■ Recording to the Chord Track A special Chord track is provided for recording accompaniment data. This is automatically recorded to the Chord track (track A). Selecting the Chord track automatically turns on the accompaniment. • If accompaniment has already been turned on before entering the Record mode, the Chord track is automatically selected. ■ Recording to a Melody Track (1 - 5) Five independent Melody tracks are provided for recording your keyboard performance. Normally, you’ll want to record these after you’ve recorded the Chord track. You can also record the Chord track and one of the Melody tracks simultaneously. 57 Song Recording Muting Tracks During Playback While recording is enabled, you can selectively mute different tracks. This is useful for when you want to clearly hear certain tracks, and not others, during recording. Muting can also be done “on the fly” during playback. To use muting, press the corresponding SONG MEMORY button, repeatedly if necessary, until the desired track number in the display is off. Each press of a SONG MEMORY button (when playback is stopped) cycles through the following settings: Track number off — Track is muted. Track number flashes — Track will record.* * Cannot be selected during playback. Track number on — Track will play back. 4 Start recording. When the beat marks and track number start flashing, you can start recording simply by playing the keyboard (or by pressing the [START/STOP] button). User 2 rEC 001 001 Indicates the current measure If you want to rehearse your part before recording, press the [SYNC START] button to turn Sync Start off. After rehearsing, press [SYNC START] again to return to the above condition. ■ When recording the Chord track With Sync Start on, play the first chord of the song in the auto accompaniment area of the keyboard. The accompaniment starts automatically and you can continue recording, playing other chords in time with the accompaniment. 5 Stop recording. After you’ve finished playing the part, press the [START/STOP] or [REC] button. 6 Record to other tracks as desired. To do this, simply repeat steps #3 - #5 above. Make sure that when you press the SONG MEMORY button corresponding to the desired track, the track number in the display flashes. 7 Listen to your new recording. To play back the song from the beginning, simply press the [START/STOP] button again. Playback stops when the [START/STOP] button is pressed again. 58 Song Recording Song Clear The Song Clear operation completely erases all recorded data on all tracks of a selected User song. Use this operation only when you’re sure you want to erase a song and record a new one. To erase an individual track of a song while leaving the other tracks intact, use the Track Clear operation (page 60). 1 Select the desired song. Press the [SONG] button, then use the numeric keypad or [+]/[-] buttons to select the desired song (201 - 205). User 2 202 2 While holding down the [A] button, press SONG MEMORY button [1]. All track indications in the display flash, indicating that all tracks are to be erased. ClrUser2 YES 3 4 Press the [+/YES] button. At the “Sure?” prompt, press the [+/YES] button, or press the [-/NO] button to abort. Pressing the [+/YES] button executes the Song Clear operation. Pressing the [-/NO] button aborts. WRITING! 59 Song Recording Track Clear The Track Clear operation completely erases all recorded data on a selected track of a selected User song, leaving the other tracks intact. Use this operation only when you’re sure you want to erase a track and record a new one. To erase the data of an entire song, use the Song Clear operation (page 59). 1 Select the desired song. Press the [SONG] button, then use the numeric keypad or [+]/[-] buttons to select the desired song (201 - 205). User 2 202 2 Press and hold down the button corresponding to the track to be erased. Press and hold down the appropriate SONG MEMORY button ([1] - [5], [A]) for at least one second. ClrTr1 YES 3 4 Press the [+/YES] button. At the “Sure?” prompt, press the [+/YES] button, or press the [-/NO] button to abort. Pressing the [+/YES] button executes the Track Clear operation. Pressing the [-/NO] button aborts. WRITING! 60 Song Lesson The Lesson feature provides an exceptionally fun and easy-to-use way to learn how to read music and play the keyboard. Lesson lets you practice the left- and right-hand parts of each song independently, step by step, until you’ve mastered them and are ready to practice with both hands together. These practices are divided into four Lesson steps, as described below. Lessons 1 - 3 apply to each hand; press the appropriate button, [L] (left) or [R] (right) to select the desired part for practice. Naturally, you can also use Song data you’ve loaded from computer with the Lesson features. ■ Lesson 1 — Timing This lesson step lets you practice just the timing of the notes — any note can be used, as long as you play in rhythm. ■ Lesson 2 — Waiting In this lesson step, the PSR-292 waits for you to play the correct notes before continuing playback of the song. ■ Lesson 3 — Minus One This lesson step plays back the song with one part muted, letting you play and master the missing part yourself — in rhythm and at the proper tempo. ■ Lesson 4 — Both Hands Lesson 4 is a “Minus One” practice essentially the same as Lesson 3, except that both the left- and right-hand parts are muted — letting you play and master both hands at the same time. Using the Lesson Feature 1 Select one of the Lesson songs. Press the [SONG] button, then use the dial or numeric keypad or [+]/[-] buttons to select the desired song. or FurElise 036 The songs are divided into several different categories or music genres. 61 Song Lesson 2 Select the part you wish to work on (left or right) and the Lesson step. If you want to work on the right-hand part, press the [R] button; to work on the left, press the [L] button. Pressing either button repeatedly cycles through the available Lesson steps in order: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson 3 → Off → Lesson 1, etc. The selected Lesson step is indicated in the display. Timing Timing L 1 r1 Waiting Waiting L 2 r2 MinusOne MinusOne L 3 FurElise r3 FurElise (Song Lesson off) 036 (Song Lesson off) 036 To select Lesson 4, press both [L] and [R] buttons simultaneously. BothHand Lr4 3 Start the Lesson. The Lesson and song playback start automatically (following a lead-in count) as soon as the Lesson step is selected. When the Lesson is finished, your performance “grade” is shown in the display (if the Grade function is turned on; page 65). After a short pause, the Lesson begins again automatically. * * * å * r1 4 060 001 Asterisks appear indicating the timing at which you should play the notes. The line of asterisks represents one full measure. Sixteenth notes are indicated by an alternating asterisk and sharp sign. Press the [START/STOP] button to stop the Lesson. The PSR-292 exits from the Lesson feature automatically when the [START/ STOP] button is pressed. 62 Song Lesson Select the Lesson Track This function allows you to select the track number of a loaded song from computer (only SMF format 0). The track number of the song can be specified in the Function mode (page 76). Lesson 1 — Timing This lesson step lets you practice just the timing of the notes — any note can be used, as long as you play in rhythm. Pick a note to play. For the left hand, use a note in the auto accompaniment area or play the appropriate left-hand note; for the right, play a note above F#2. Simply concentrate on playing each note in time with the rhythmic accompaniment. 1 2 • The melody note does not sound unless your playing is in time with the rhythm. Select one of the Lesson songs. Select Lesson 1. Press the [L] or [R] button (repeatedly, if necessary) until Lesson 1 is indicated. Timing r1 3 Play the appropriate melody or chord with the song. After the lead-in, the song starts automatically, and the appropriate notes appear in the display. In Lesson 1, simply play one note repeatedly in time with the music. Regarding chords and the use of the left hand, the PSR-292 actually has two different types of songs: 1) songs with normal left-hand chords, and 2) songs in which the left hand plays arpeggios or melodic figures in combination with the right. In the case of the first type, play the chords with your left hand in the auto accompaniment area of the keyboard. Auto accompaniment area 63 Song Lesson Lesson 2 — Waiting In this lesson step, the PSR-292 waits for you to play the correct notes before continuing playback of the song. This lets you practice reading the music at your own pace. The notes to be played are shown in the display, one after another, as you play them correctly. 1 2 Select one of the Lesson songs. Select Lesson 2. Press the [L] or [R] button (repeatedly, if necessary) until Lesson 2 is indicated. Waiting r2 3 Play the appropriate melody or chord with the song. After the lead-in, the song starts automatically, and the appropriate notes appear in the display. In Lesson 2, play the correct notes at your own pace, until you can master playing them in rhythm. Lesson 3 — Minus One This lesson step lets you practice one part of the song in rhythm at the proper tempo. The PSR-292 plays back the song accompaniment with one part muted (either the left part or the right)— letting you play and master the missing part yourself. The notes you are to play are shown continuously in the display as the song plays back. 1 2 Select one of the Lesson songs. Select Lesson 3. Press the [L] or [R] button (repeatedly, if necessary) until Lesson 3 is indicated. MinusOne r3 64 Song Lesson 3 Play the appropriate part with the song. After the lead-in, the song starts automatically, and the appropriate notes appear in the display. In Lesson 3, listen carefully to the un-muted part, and play the muted part yourself. Lesson 4 — Both Hands Lesson 4 is a “Minus One” practice essentially the same as Lesson 3, except that both the left- and right-hand parts are muted — letting you play and master both hands at the same time. Go on to this lesson step after you’ve mastered each hand’s part in the previous three lesson steps. Practice both hands in time with the rhythm along with the notation in the display. 1 2 Select one of the Lesson songs. Select Lesson 4. Press the [L] and [R] buttons simultaneously, so that Lesson 4 is indicated. BothHand Lr4 3 Play both the left- and right-hand parts with the song. After the lead-in, the song starts automatically, and the appropriate notes appear in the display. In Lesson 4, both parts (left and right) are muted, letting you play the entire song by yourself. Grade The Lesson feature has a built-in evaluation function that monitors your practicing of the Lesson songs, and just like a real teacher, it tells you how well you did each exercise. Four grades are assigned, depending on your performance: “OK,” “Good,” “Very Good,” and “Excellent.” • Grade is automatically set to on as the default setting. The evaluation function can be set to on/off in the Function mode (page 76). 65 MIDI Functions The PSR-292 is MIDI-compatible, featuring MIDI IN and MIDI OUT terminals and providing a variety of MIDI-related controls. By using the MIDI functions you can expand your musical possibilities. This section explains what MIDI is, and what it can do, as well as how you can use MIDI on your PSR-292. What Is MIDI? No doubt you have heard the terms “acoustic instrument” and “digital instrument.” In the world today, these are the two main categories of instruments. Let’s consider an acoustic piano and a classical guitar as representative acoustic instruments. They are easy to understand. With the piano, you strike a key, and a hammer inside hits some strings and plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a string and the note sounds. But how does a digital instrument go about playing a note? Acoustic guitar note production Digital instrument note production L Sampling Note Tone Generator (Electronic circuit) Sampling Note R Playing the keyboard Pluck a string and the body resonates the sound. Based on playing information from the keyboard, a sampling note stored in the tone generator is played through the speakers. As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic instrument the sampling note (previously recorded note) stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit) is played based on information received from the keyboard. So then what is the information from the keyboard that becomes the basis for note production? For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note using the grand piano sound on the PSR-292 keyboard. Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated note, the electronic instrument puts out information from the keyboard such as “with what voice,” “with which key,” “about how strong,” “when was it pressed,” and “when was it released.” Then each piece of information is changed into a number value and sent to the tone generator. Using these numbers as a basis, the tone generator plays the stored sampling note. ● Example of Keyboard Information Voice number (with what voice) Note number (with which key) Note on (when was it pressed) and note off (when was it released) Velocity (about how strong) 01 (grand piano) 60 (C3) Timing expressed numerically (quarter note) 20 (strong) GM System Level 1 “GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level 1. The PSR-292 supports GM System Level 1. 66 MIDI Functions MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface, which allows electronic musical instruments to communicate with each other, by sending and receiving compatible Note, Control Change, Program Change and various other types of MIDI data, or messages. The PSR-292 can control a MIDI device by transmitting note related data and various types of controller data. The PSR-292 can be controlled by the incoming MIDI messages which automatically determine tone generator mode, select MIDI channels, voices and effects, change parameter values and of course play the voices specified for the various parts. MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: Channel messages and System messages. Below is an explanation of the various types of MIDI messages which the PSR-292 can receive/transmit. ● Channel Messages The PSR-292 is an electronic instrument that can handle 16 channels. This is usually expressed as “it can play 16 instruments at the same time.” Channel messages transmit information such as Note ON/OFF, Program Change, for each of the 16 channels. Message Name Note ON/OFF Program Change Control Change PSR-292 Operation/Panel Setting Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played. Each message includes a specific note number which corresponds to the key which is pressed, plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is stuck. Voice number (along with corresponding bank select MSB/LSB settings, if necessary). Messages that are used to change some aspect of the sound (modulation, volume, pan, etc.). ● System Messages This is data that is used in common by the entire MIDI system. System messages include messages like Exclusive Messages that transmit data unique to each instrument manufacturer and Realtime Messages that control the MIDI device. Message Name Exclusive Message Realtime Messages PSR-292 Operation/Panel Setting Reverb/chorus/DSP settings, etc. Start/stop operation The messages transmitted/received by the PSR-292 are shown in the MIDI Implementation Chart on page 90. MIDI Terminals In order to exchange MIDI data between multiple devices, each device must be connected by a cable. The MIDI terminals of the PSR-292 are located on the rear panel. MIDI IN MIDI OUT Receives MIDI data from another MIDI device. Transmits the PSR-292’s keyboard information as MIDI data to another MIDI device. • Special MIDI cables (sold separately) must be used for connecting to MIDI devices. They can be bought at music stores, etc. • Never use MIDI cables longer than about 15 meters. Cables longer than this can pick up noise which can cause data errors. 67 MIDI Functions Connecting to a Personal Computer By connecting your PSR-292’s MIDI terminals to a personal computer, you can have access to a wide variety of music software. ● When using a MIDI interface device installed in the personal computer, connect the MIDI terminals of the personal computer and the PSR-292. MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI IN PSR-292 MIDI OUT Computer (sequencer software) ● When using a MIDI interface with a Macintosh series computer, connect the RS-422 terminal of the computer (modem or printer terminal) to the MIDI interface, as shown in the diagram below. MIDI Interface RS-422 MIDI IN PSR-292 Viewing the Notation for MIDI Channel 1 • The PSR-292 has a special function that lets you view the notes of the MIDI data (channel 1 only) on the display. MIDI OUT Computer (sequencer software) ● When connecting to a computer with a USB interface, use the Yamaha UX16 USB/MIDI Interface. Connect the UX16 and the computer with a standard USB cable, then make the proper MIDI connections between the PSR-292 and the UX16. UX16 MIDI IN OUT IN USB Computer (sequencer software) 68 MIDI OUT • When using a Macintosh series computer, set the MIDI interface clock setting in the application software to match the setting of the MIDI interface you are using. For details, refer to the owner’s manual for the software you are using. PSR-292 MIDI Functions Local Control This function lets you enable or disable keyboard control over the PSR-292’s voices in the Function mode (page 76). This would come in handy, for example, when recording notes to MIDI sequencer. If you are using the sequencer to play back the voices of the PSR-292, you would want to set this to “off” — in order to avoid getting “double” notes, both from the keyboard and from the sequencer. Normally, when playing the PSR-292 by itself, this should be set to “on.” • No sound is output from the PSR-292 when Local ON/OFF is set to OFF. Using Initial Setup Send with a Sequencer The most common use for the Initial Setup Send function is in recording a song on a sequencer that is intended for playback with the PSR-292. Essentially, this takes a “snapshot” of the PSR-292 settings and sends that data to the sequencer. By recording this “snapshot” at the start of the song (before any actual performance data), you can instantly restore the necessary settings on the PSR-292 in the Function mode (page 76). Provided there is a pause in the song, you could also do this in the middle of a song — for example, completely changing the PSR292 settings for the next section of the song. • When the Initial Setup Send operation is completed, the PSR292 automatically returns to the previous panel condition. External Clock This determines whether the style and song playback functions are controlled by the PortaTone’s internal clock (off) or by MIDI clock data from an external sequencer or computer (on). This should be set to on when you want to have style or song playback follow the external device (such as a rhythm machine or a sequencer). The default setting is off. • If External Clock is set to ON, style or song playback will not start unless external clock are received. These settings can be made in the Function mode (page 76). Bulk Data Send This lets you save important PortaTone data and settings to another device (such as a sequencer, computer, or MIDI data filer). These settings can be made in the Function mode (page 76). ● Bulk Data Receive Send the Bulk Data from computer or sequencer to the PSR-292. • Keep in mind that all recorded Song data and One Touch Setting data operations replace the data. 69 MIDI Functions Keyboard Out This determines whether Keyboard performance data of the Portatone is transmitted via MIDI OUT or not. These settings can be made in the Function mode (page 76). Style Out This determines whether style data is transmitted via MIDI OUT or not. These settings can be made in the Function mode (page 76). Song Out This determines whether Song data is transmitted via MIDI OUT or not. These settings can be made in the Function mode (page 76). • For the Song #001, data is not transmitted. MIDI LSB Receive Cancel Determines whether the LSB data of Bank Select is received or not. Press and hold the lowest key and turn on the power to change the setting (LSB is ignored). To restore MIDI LSB Receive Cancel to normal (LSB is recognized), turn on the power again normally. 70 MIDI Functions Loading a Song into PSR-292’s Flash Memory The PSR-292’s internal flash memory enables you to save song data transmitted from a connected personal computer. You can play or practice Flash songs (saved in flash memory) in the same way as preset songs. To transmit song data from a personal computer to the PSR-292, you first need to install the “Song Filer” application to your computer. Song data that can be saved in flash memory: • The number of songs: • Available memory: • Data format: max. 99 songs (Song #101–#199) 352 KB SMF format 0 ■ Installing Song Filer • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • You can download the “Song Filer” application from the following Yamaha PK CLUB website. Make sure that your computer has an Internet connection. Yamaha PK CLUB (Portable Keyboard Home Page) http://www.yamahaPKclub.com/ • Visit the Yamaha PK CLUB website for more information on the latest version of Song Filer (version 2.0.0 or higher) and how to install it. System requirements for Song Filer: [Windows] OS: CPU: Available Memory: Free space in Hard Disk: Display: Windows 95/98/Me/2000 Pentium/100MHz or faster 8MB or more 2MB or more 800 x 600, 256 colors or more [Macintosh] OS: CPU: Available Memory: Free space in Hard Disk: Display: Mac OS 7.5 or upper Power PC or upper 8MB or more 2MB or more 800 x 600, 256 colors or more 71 MIDI Functions ■ Song Filer • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • After you install Song Filer and connect the PSR-292 to the computer, you can use the two functions described below. ● Transmit Files You can transmit song files from your computer to your PSR-292’s Flash Memory. • Refer to page 68 for information on connecting the PSR-292 to a computer. • You cannot use the Song Filer’s “Receive Files” function with the PSR-292. • For more information on using Song Filer, refer to the PDF manual included in the Song Filer application. Transmit PSR-292 Computer ● Manage Files on Flash Memory You can delete and rename files in your PSR-292’s Flash Memory from your computer. Delete Rename abcd.mid abcd.mid • Never attempt to turn the power off while transmitting song data. Doing so will not only result in failure to save the data, but also make the internal flash memory unstable. It may also clear all the data residing in the flash memory when turning the power on and off. • Saved data in the instrument may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Retain important data to your computer or floppy disk. efgh.mid Selecting a right & left hand guide track You can select a track in the Function mode (page 76) to guide your right and left hand fingering during the Lesson (page 63). This function is available only when you select a flash memory song (SMF format 0). 72 MIDI Functions PC Mode The PC Mode lets you instantly reconfigure the MIDI control settings for use with a computer or MIDI device. ● Default settings PC mode is on LOCAL ON/OFF EXTERNAL CLOCK KEYBOARD OUT STYLE OUT SONG OUT PC mode is off ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ■ To turn the PC mode on or off: Press the [PC] button and then press the appropriate [+]/[-] button. This switches between the PC Mode on/off settings. PC Mode on ■ To store the PC mode parameters: 1 Change the PC mode parameters. Change the desired MIDI parameters in the Function mode. The following PC Mode parameters can be stored to memory. LOCAL ON/OFF EXTERNAL KEYBOARD STYLE OUT SONG OUT 2 • No sound is output from the PSR-292 when Local ON/OFF is set to OFF. • If External Clock is set to ON, style or song playback will not start unless external clock are received. Store the parameters to the PC memory. Press and hold the [PC] button until “WRITING!” appears in the LCD. WRITING! 73 Function The PSR-292 has a variety of settings in the Function parameters. These give you detailed control over many of the PSR-292’s features. Using the Function parameters Press the Function button. OVERALL ]/[ ] buttons to select a Function name. M.Volume 104 3 Input the appropriate value or use the [+]/[-] buttons to set the selected Function. You can also use the dial. or 74 f Use the SELECT [ < Select a Function name. > 2 • To save the Function parameters and the Touch on/off status to internal memory (flash memory), press and hold the [FUNCTION] button. (See page 78.) r 1 • Use the CATEGORY [ ]/[ ] buttons when selecting the category steps. Function ● Function parameters CATEGORY SELECT Overall Transpose Transpos Tuning Tuning Split Point SplitPnt Main Voice Dual Voice Split Voice Display Range/ Settings -12–12 -100–100 000–127 Description This determines the transposition of the entire PSR-292 sound. This determines the pitch of the entire PSR-292 sound . This determines the highest key for the Split voice and sets the Split “point” — in other words, the key that separates the Split (lower) and Main (upper) voices. (The Split voice sounds up to and including the Split Point key.) The default Split Point is 054 (F#2). The Split Point setting and Accompaniment Split Point setting are automatically set to the same value. 1–3 A setting of “1” results in limited touch response; this setting produces a relatively narrow dynamic range, no matter how lightly or strongly you play the keys. “2” lets you play over a normal dynamic range (soft to loud), while “3” is designed for playing very soft passages, giving you slightly more detailed control in the soft volume range. When Touch is turned off (page 30), a constant velocity value of 80 is produced (total velocity range = 0–127). 0–127 This determines the volume of the Main voice, letting you create an optimum mix with the Dual or Split voice. -2–2 This determines the octave range for the Main voice. Use this to set the (octave) most suitable range for the Main voice. 0 (full left)–64 This determines the pan position of the Main voice in the stereo image. * * * * Touch Sensitivity TouchSns Volume M.Volume Octave M.Octave Pan M.Pan Reverb Send Level Chorus Send Level DSP Send Level Voice Volume M.RevLvl 0–127 This determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Higher values result in a louder Reverb effect. M.ChoLvl 0–127 This determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Cho- * rus effect. Higher values result in a louder Chorus effect. M.DspLvl 0–127 * D.Voice D.Volume 1–605 0–127 Octave D.Octave -2–2 (octave) Pan D.Pan 0 (full left)–64 (center) –127 (full right) Reverb Send Level Chorus Send Level DSP Send Level Voice Volume D.RevLvl 0–127 D.ChoLvl 0–127 D.DspLvl 0–127 S.Voice S.Volume 1–605 0–127 Octave S.Octave -2–2 (octave) Pan S.Pan 0 (full left)–64 (center) –127 (full right) Reverb Send Level Chorus Send Level DSP Send Level S.RevLvl 0–127 This determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the DSP effect. Higher values result in a louder DSP effect. This select the dual voice. This determines the volume of the Dual voice, letting you create an optimum mix with the Main voice. This determines the octave range for the Dual voice. Use this to create an octave layer with the Main voice. This determines the pan position of the Dual voice in the stereo image. For a spacious sounding effect, set this value at or near 0, and set the Main Voice Pan at the opposite positive value. This determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Higher values result in a louder Reverb effect for the Dual voice. This determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Higher values result in a louder Chorus effect for the Dual voice. This determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the DSP effect. Higher values result in a louder DSP effect for the Dual voice. This select the split voice. This determines the volume of the Split voice, letting you create an optimum mix with the Main voice. This determines the octave range for the Split voice. Use this to set the most suitable range for the Split (lower) voice. This determines the pan position of the Split voice in the stereo image. For a spacious sounding effect, set this value at or near 0, and set the Main Voice Pan at the opposite positive value. This determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Higher values result in a louder Reverb effect for the Split voice. S.ChoLvl 0–127 This determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Higher values result in a louder Chorus effect for the Split voice. * S.DspLvl 0–127 This determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the DSP effect. Higher values result in a louder DSP effect for the Split voice. * (center) –127 (full right) * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * The “*” mark indicates that the setting can be restored to default value by pressing both [+]/[-] buttons simultaneously. 75 Function CATEGORY SELECT Display Effect Reverb Type Chorus Type DSP Type Reverb Range/ Settings 1–9 Chorus 1–5 DSP 1–39 Harmony Type Harmony Volume HarmType 1–26 HarmVol 0–127 Local On/ Off External Clock Bulk Data Send Local On/Off ExtClock On/Off BulkSend YES/NO Initial Setup Send InitSend YES/NO Keyboard Out KbdOut On/Off Style Out StyleOut On/Off Song Out SongOut On/Off Style StyleVol 0–127 Song Volume Time Signature Lesson Track (R) Lesson Track (L) Grade On/ Off Demo and DJ Cancel Song8Vol Mtr8Vol Time8Sig 0–127 0–127 0–15 R-Part 1–16 L-Part 1–16 Grade On/Off D-Cancel On/Off Harmony MIDI Volume Metronome Lesson Utility Description This determines the Reverb type, including “off.” (See the list on page 33). This determines the Chorus type, including “off.” (See the list on page 34). This determines the DSP type, including “off.” (See the list on page 34). This determines the Harmony type. (See the list on page 33). This determines the level of the Harmony effect when Harmony type 1-5 is selected, letting you create the optimum mix with the original melody note. This determines the Local on or off. Press the [+]/[-] buttons to set Local Control to on or off. This determines the External clock or Internal clock. Press the [+]/[-] buttons to set External clock or Internal clock. This lets you save important PortaTone data and settings to another device (such as a sequencer, computer, or MIDI data filer). Use the [YES/+] button to transmit the data. Use the [NO/-] button to stop the transmission. This lets you save PortaTone initial data to another device (such as a sequencer, computer, or MIDI data filer). Use the [YES/+] button to transmit the data. Use the [NO/-] button to stop the transmission. This determines whether Keyboard performance data of the Portatone is transmitted or not. Use the [+]/[-] buttons to change the setting. This determines whether style data is transmitted via MIDI OUT or not. Press the [+]/[-] buttons to set the Style Out to on or off. This determines whether Song data is transmitted via MIDI OUT or not. Press the [+]/[-] buttons to set Song Out to on or off. (For song #001, data is not transmitted.) This determines the volume of the style, letting you create an optimum mix with your performance. This determines the volume of the Song. This determines the volume of the Metronome. This determines the time signature of the Metronome. * This determines the track number for your right hand lesson. This setting is effective only loaded song. This determines the track number for your left hand lesson. This setting is effective only loaded song. This determines whether Grade function is on or off. Press the [+]/[-] buttons to set Grade to on or off. This determines the Demo and DJ cancel is enabled or not. Press the [+]/[-] buttons to set Demo and DJ Cancel to on or off. * * The “*” mark indicates that the setting can be restored to default value by pressing both [+]/[-] buttons simultaneously. 76 * * * * * * * * * Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause and Solution When the PSR-292 is turned on or off, a popping sound is temporarily produced. This is normal and indicates that the PSR-292 is receiving electrical power. When using a mobile phone, noise is produced. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the PSR-292 may produce interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from the PSR-292. There is no sound even when the keyboard is played or when a song is being played back. Check that nothing is connected to the PHONES/OUTPUT jack on the rear panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack, no sound is output. Check the Local Control on/off. (See page 69.) Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard does not produce any sound. When using the Dictionary function (page 45), the keys in the right hand area are used only for entering the chord root and type. The sound of the voices or rhythms seems unusual or strange. The battery power is too low. Replace the batteries. (See page 10.) The auto accompaniment doesn’t turn on, even when pressing the [ACMP] button. Make sure the Style mode is active before using the auto accompaniment. Press the [STYLE] button to enable style operations. The style or song does not play back even when pressing the [START/STOP] button. Check the External Clock on/off. (See page 69.) The style does not sound properly. Make sure that the Style Volume (page 42) is set to an appropriate level. Make sure that the Split Point (page 27) is set to an appropriate value. When playing back one of the Pianist styles (#124 - #135), the rhythm cannot be heard. This is normal. The Pianist styles have no drums or bass — only piano accompaniment. The accompaniment of the style can only be heard when accompaniment is set to ON and keys are played in the auto accompaniment area of the keyboard. Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound seems to be cut off. The PSR-292 is polyphonic up to a maximum of 32 notes. If the Dual voice or Split voice is being used and a style or song is playing back at the same time, some notes/sounds may be omitted (or “stolen”) from the accompaniment or song. A strange “flanging” or “doubling” sound occurs when using the PSR-292 with a sequencer. (This may also sound like a “dual” layered sound of two voices, even when Dual is turned off.) When using the style with a sequencer, set MIDI Echo (or the relevant control) to “off.” (Refer to the owner’s manual of your particular device and/or software for details.) The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the opposite effect. For example, pressing the footswitch cuts off the sound and releasing it sustains the sounds. The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power. The sound of the voice changes from note to note. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple recordings (samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the actual sound of the voice may be slightly different from note to note. 77 Data Backup & Initialization ■ Data Backup • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • The following data can be stored to internal flash memory as data backup. Group SONG ONE TOUCH SETTING PC FUNCTION Touch Parameter User Song Data See page 28. PC Memory Tuning Split Point Touch Sensitivity Style Volume Song Volume Metronome Volume Grade On/Off Demo & DJ Cancel Touch On/Off ● About the Internal Flash Memory The Song, One Touch Setting and PC parameters are automatically stored when each saving operation is done. Function and touch On/Off are stored when Pressing and Holding the Function button. • Never attempt to turn the power off when a “WRITING!” message is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the internal flash memory and result in loss of data. ■ Data Initialization • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ● All Data Initialization All data can be initialized and restored to the factory preset condition by turning on the power while holding the highest (rightmost) white key and highest (rightmost) black key on the keyboard. “All Mem CLr” will appear briefly on the display. • All data listed above, plus loaded song data, will be erased and/or changed when the All Data Initialization procedure is carried out. • Carrying out the data initialization procedure will usually restore normal operation if the PSR-292 freezes or begins to act erratically for any reason. All Mem CLr ● Loaded Song Initializaion You can erase only the loaded song data by turning on the power while holding the highest (rightmost) black key on the keyboard. 78 Voice List ■ Maximum Polyphony • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • The PSR-292 has 32-note maximum polyphony. This means that it can play a maximum of up to 32 notes at once, regardless of what functions are used. Auto Accompaniment uses a number of the available notes, so when Auto Accompaniment is used the total number of available notes for playing on the keyboard is correspondingly reduced. The same applies to the Split Voice and Song functions. • The Voice List includes MIDI program change numbers for each voice. Use these program change numbers when playing the PSR-292 via MIDI from an external device. • Some voices may sound continuously or have a long decay after the notes have been released while the sustain pedal (footswitch) is held. ● Panel Voice List Bank Select Voice No. MSB LSB 001 002 003 004 005 006 0 0 0 0 0 0 112 112 112 112 113 112 007 008 009 010 011 012 0 0 0 0 0 0 114 112 112 113 114 112 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 112 113 112 116 112 114 118 119 114 112 113 112 025 026 027 028 0 0 0 0 113 112 113 112 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 112 112 113 112 113 112 117 112 112 112 039 040 0 0 112 112 MIDI Program Voice Name Change# PIANO 0 Grand Piano 1 Bright Piano 3 Honky-tonk Piano 2 MIDI Grand Piano 2 CP 80 6 Harpsichord E.PIANO 4 Galaxy EP 4 Funky Electric Piano 5 DX Modern Elec. Piano 5 Hyper Tines 5 Venus Electric Piano 7 Clavi ORGAN 16 Jazz Organ 1 16 Jazz Organ 2 17 Click Organ 16 Bright Organ 18 Rock Organ 18 Purple Organ 16 16'+2' Organ 16 16'+4' Organ 16 Theater Organ 19 Church Organ 19 Chapel Organ 20 Reed Organ ACCORDION 21 Traditional Accordion 21 Musette Accordion 23 Bandoneon 22 Harmonica GUITAR 24 Classical Guitar 25 Folk Guitar 25 12Strings Guitar 26 Jazz Guitar 26 Octave Guitar 27 Clean Guitar 27 60’s Clean Guitar 28 Muted Guitar 29 Overdriven Guitar 30 Distortion Guitar BASS 32 Acoustic Bass 33 Finger Bass Bank Select Voice No. MSB 041 042 043 044 045 046 0 0 0 0 0 0 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 059 060 061 062 0 0 0 0 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 072 073 074 075 076 077 0 0 0 0 0 0 078 079 080 0 0 0 MIDI Program Voice Name LSB Change# 112 34 Pick Bass 112 35 Fretless Bass 112 36 Slap Bass 112 38 Synth Bass 113 38 Hi-Q Bass 113 39 Dance Bass STRINGS 112 48 String Ensemble 112 49 Chamber Strings 112 50 Synth Strings 113 49 Slow Strings 112 44 Tremolo Strings 112 45 Pizzicato Strings 112 55 Orchestra Hit 112 40 Violin 112 42 Cello 112 43 Contrabass 112 105 Banjo 112 46 Harp CHOIR 112 52 Choir 113 52 Vocal Ensemble 112 53 Vox Humana 112 54 Air Choir SAXOPHONE 112 64 Soprano Sax 112 65 Alto Sax 112 66 Tenor Sax 114 66 Breathy Tenor 112 67 Baritone Sax 112 68 Oboe 112 69 English Horn 112 70 Bassoon 112 71 Clarinet TRUMPET 112 56 Trumpet 112 59 Muted Trumpet 112 57 Trombone 113 57 Trombone Section 112 60 French Horn 112 58 Tuba BRASS 112 61 Brass Section 113 61 Big Band Brass 119 61 Mellow Horns 79 Voice List Bank Select Voice No. MSB 081 082 083 0 0 0 084 085 086 087 088 0 0 0 0 0 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 096 097 098 099 100 0 0 0 0 0 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 127 126 126 MIDI Program Voice Name LSB Change# 112 62 Synth Brass 113 62 Jump Brass 114 62 Techno Brass FLUTE 112 73 Flute 112 72 Piccolo 112 75 Pan Flute 112 74 Recorder 112 79 Ocarina SYNTH LEAD 112 80 Square Lead 112 81 Sawtooth Lead 112 85 Voice Lead 112 98 Star Dust 112 100 Brightness 115 81 Analogon 119 81 Fargo SYNTH PAD 112 88 Fantasia 113 100 Bell Pad 112 91 Xenon Pad 112 94 Equinox 113 89 Dark Moon PERCUSSION 112 11 Vibraphone 112 12 Marimba 112 13 Xylophone 112 114 Steel Drums 112 8 Celesta 112 14 Tubular Bells 112 47 Timpani 112 10 Music Box DRUM KITS 0 0 Standard Kit 1 0 1 Standard Kit 2 0 8 Room Kit 0 16 Rock Kit 0 24 Electronic Kit 0 25 Analog Kit 0 27 Dance Kit 0 32 Jazz Kit 0 40 Brush Kit 0 48 Symphony Kit 0 0 SFX Kit 1 0 1 SFX Kit 2 ● XG Voice List 80 Bank Select Voice No. MSB LSB 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 18 40 41 0 1 0 MIDI Program Change# PIANO 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 2 Voice Name Grand Piano Grand Piano KSP Mellow Grand Piano Piano Strings Dream Bright Piano Bright Piano KSP Electric Grand Piano Bank Select Voice No. MSB LSB 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 32 40 41 0 1 0 1 18 32 40 140 0 45 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 64 0 1 32 33 34 40 41 42 150 0 45 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 25 35 0 1 27 64 65 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 64 0 1 45 0 1 64 97 98 0 0 96 97 0 35 96 97 180 181 182 183 184 0 0 0 0 0 0 32 33 34 35 MIDI Program Change# 2 2 2 2 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 Voice Name Electric Grand Piano KSP Detuned CP80 Layered CP 1 Layered CP 2 Honky-tonk Piano Honky-tonk Piano KSP Electric Piano 1 Electric Piano 1 KSP Mellow Electric Piano 1 Chorus Electric Piano 1 Hard Electric Piano Velocity Crossfade Electric 4 Piano 1 4 60’s Electric Piano 1 5 Electric Piano 2 5 Electric Piano 2 KSP 5 Chorus Electric Piano 2 5 DX Electric Piano Hard 5 DX Legend 5 DX Phase Electric Piano 5 DX + Analog Electric Piano 5 DX Koto Electric Piano Velocity Crossfade Electric 5 Piano 2 6 Harpsichord 6 Harpsichord KSP 6 Harpsichord 2 6 Harpsichord 3 7 Clavi 7 Clavi KSP 7 Clavi Wah 7 Pulse Clavi 7 Pierce Clavi CHROMATIC 8 Celesta 9 Glockenspiel 10 Music Box 10 Orgel 11 Vibraphone 11 Vibraphone KSP 11 Hard Vibraphone 12 Marimba 12 Marimba KSP 12 Sine Marimba 12 Balimba 12 Log Drums 13 Xylophone 14 Tubular Bells 14 Church Bells 14 Carillon 15 Dulcimer 15 Dulcimer 2 15 Cimbalom 15 Santur ORGAN 16 DrawOrg 16 DetDrawOrg 16 60sDrawOrg1 16 60sDrawOrg2 16 70sDrawOrg1 Voice List Bank Select Voice No. MSB LSB 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 36 37 38 40 64 65 66 67 0 24 32 33 37 0 64 65 66 0 32 35 40 64 65 0 40 0 32 0 32 0 64 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 25 43 96 0 16 35 40 MIDI Program Change# 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 17 17 17 17 17 18 18 18 18 19 19 19 19 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 GUITAR 24 24 24 24 24 25 25 25 25 225 0 41 25 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 96 0 18 32 0 32 0 40 41 43 45 0 43 0 40 41 0 25 26 26 26 27 27 28 28 28 28 28 29 29 30 30 30 31 Voice Name DrawOrg2 60sDrawOrg3 Even Bar 16+2"2/3 Organ Bass 70sDrawOrg2 Cheezy Organ DrawOrg3 Percussive Organ 70’s Percussive Organ Detuned Percussive Organ Light Organ Percussive Organ 2 Rock Organ Rotary Organ Slow Rotary Fast Rotary Church Organ Church Organ 3 Church Organ 2 Notre Dame Organ Flute Tremolo Organ Flute Reed Organ Puff Organ Accordion Accord It Hamonica Harmonica 2 Tango Accordion Tango Accordion 2 Nylon Guitar Nylon Guitar 2 Nylon Guitar 3 Velocity Guitar Harmonics Ukulele Steel Guitar Steel Guitar 2 12-string Guitar Nylon & Steel Guitar Steel Guitar with Body Sound Mandolin Jazz Guitar Mellow Guitar Jazz Amp Clean Guitar Chorus Guitar Muted Guitar Funk Guitar 1 Muted Steel Guitar Funk Guitar 2 Jazz Man Overdriven Guitar Guitar Pinch Distortion Guitar Feedback Guitar Feedback Guitar 2 Guitar Harmonics Bank Select Voice No. MSB LSB 243 244 0 0 65 66 245 246 0 0 0 40 MIDI Program Change# 31 31 BASS 32 32 247 0 45 32 248 249 250 0 0 0 0 18 27 33 33 33 251 0 40 33 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 43 45 65 0 28 0 32 33 34 96 97 0 27 32 0 43 0 18 20 24 35 40 64 65 66 96 0 6 12 18 19 32 40 41 64 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 8 40 0 0 40 0 33 33 33 34 34 35 35 35 35 35 35 36 36 36 37 37 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 STRING 40 40 41 42 43 44 44 44 45 46 46 47 Voice Name Guitar Feedback Guitar Harmonics 2 Acoustic Bass Jazz Rhythm Velocity Crossfade Upright Bass Finger Bass Finger Dark Flange Bass Bass & Distorted Electric Guitar Finger Slap Bass Finger Bass 2 Modulated Bass Pick Bass Muted Pick Bass Fretless Bass Fretless Bass 2 Fretless Bass 3 Fretless Bass 4 Synth Fretless Smooth Fretless Slap Bass 1 Resonant Slap Punch Thumb Bass Slap Bass 2 Velocity Switch Slap Synth Bass 1 Synth Bass 1 Dark Fast Resonant Bass Acid Bass Clavi Bass Techno Synth Bass Orbiter Square Bass Rubber Bass Hammer Synth Bass 2 Mellow Synth Bass Sequenced Bass Click Synth Bass Synth Bass 2 Dark Smooth Synth Bass Modular Synth Bass DX Bass X Wire Bass Violin Slow Violin Viola Cello Contrabass Tremolo Strings Slow Tremolo Strings Suspense Strings Pizzicato Strings Orchestral Harp Yang Chin Timpani 81 Voice List 82 Bank Select Voice No. MSB 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 347 0 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MIDI Program Voice Name LSB Change# ENSEMBLE 0 48 Strings 1 3 48 Stereo Strings 8 48 Slow Strings 24 48 Arco Strings 35 48 60’s Strings 40 48 Orchestra 41 48 Orchestra 2 42 48 Tremolo Orchestra 45 48 Velocity Strings 0 49 Strings 2 3 49 Stereo Slow Strings 8 49 Legato Strings 40 49 Warm Strings 41 49 Kingdom 64 49 70’s Strings 65 49 String Ensemble 3 0 50 Synth Strings 1 27 50 Resonant Strings 64 50 Synth Strings 4 65 50 Synth Strings 5 0 51 Synth Strings 2 0 52 Choir Aahs 3 52 Stereo Choir 16 52 Choir Aahs 2 32 52 Mellow Choir 40 52 Choir Strings 0 53 Voice Oohs 0 54 Synth Voice 40 54 Synth Voice 2 41 54 Choral 64 54 Analog Voice 0 55 Orchestra Hit 35 55 Orchestra Hit 2 64 55 Impact BRASS 0 56 Trumpet 16 56 Trumpet 2 17 56 Bright Trumpet 32 56 Warm Trumpet 0 57 Trombone 18 57 Trombone 2 0 58 Tuba 16 58 Tuba 2 0 59 Muted Trumpet 0 60 French Horn 6 60 French Horn Solo 32 60 French Horn 2 37 60 Horn Orchestra 0 61 Brass Section Trumpet & Trombone 35 61 Section 40 61 Brass Section 2 41 61 High Brass 42 61 Mellow Brass 0 62 Synth Brass 1 12 62 Quack Brass 20 62 Resonant Synth Brass 24 62 Poly Brass 27 62 Synth Brass 3 Bank Select Voice No. MSB 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MIDI Program Voice Name LSB Change# 32 62 Jump Brass 45 62 Analog Velocity Brass 1 64 62 Analog Brass 1 0 63 Synth Brass 2 18 63 Soft Brass 40 63 Synth Brass 4 41 63 Choir Brass 45 63 Analog Velocity Brass 2 64 63 Analog Brass 2 REED 0 64 Soprano Sax 0 65 Alto Sax 40 65 Sax Section 43 65 Hyper Alto Sax 0 66 Tenor Sax 40 66 Breathy Tenor Sax 41 66 Soft Tenor Sax 64 66 Tenor Sax 2 0 67 Baritone Sax 0 68 Oboe 0 69 English Horn 0 70 Bassoon 0 71 Clarinet PIPE 0 72 Piccolo 0 73 Flute 0 74 Recorder 0 75 Pan Flute 0 76 Blown Bottle 0 77 Shakuhachi 0 78 Whistle 0 79 Ocarina SYNTH LEAD 0 80 Square Lead 6 80 Square Lead 2 8 80 LM Square 18 80 Hollow 19 80 Shroud 64 80 Mellow 65 80 Solo Sine 66 80 Sine Lead 0 81 Sawtooth Lead 6 81 Sawtooth Lead 2 8 81 Thick Sawtooth 18 81 Dynamic Sawtooth 19 81 Digital Sawtooth 20 81 Big Lead 24 81 Heavy Synth 25 81 Waspy Synth 40 81 Pulse Sawtooth 41 81 Dr. Lead 45 81 Velocity Lead 96 81 Sequenced Analog 0 82 Calliope Lead 65 82 Pure Pad 0 83 Chiff Lead 64 83 Rubby 0 84 Charang Lead 64 84 Distorted Lead 65 84 Wire Lead Voice List Bank Select Voice No. MSB 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MIDI Program Voice Name LSB Change# 0 85 Voice Lead 24 85 Synth Aahs 64 85 Vox Lead 0 86 Fifths Lead 35 86 Big Five 0 87 Bass & Lead 16 87 Big & Low 64 87 Fat & Perky 65 87 Soft Whirl SYNTH PAD 0 88 New Age Pad 64 88 Fantasy 0 89 Warm Pad 16 89 Thick Pad 17 89 Soft Pad 18 89 Sine Pad 64 89 Horn Pad 65 89 Rotary Strings 0 90 Poly Synth Pad 64 90 Poly Pad 80 65 90 Click Pad 66 90 Analog Pad 67 90 Square Pad 0 91 Choir Pad 64 91 Heaven 66 91 Itopia 67 91 CC Pad 0 92 Bowed Pad 64 92 Glacier 65 92 Glass Pad 0 93 Metallic Pad 64 93 Tine Pad 65 93 Pan Pad 0 94 Halo Pad 0 95 Sweep Pad 20 95 Shwimmer 27 95 Converge 64 95 Polar Pad 66 95 Celestial SYNTH EFFECTS 0 96 Rain 45 96 Clavi Pad 64 96 Harmo Rain 65 96 African Wind 66 96 Carib 0 97 Sound Track 27 97 Prologue 64 97 Ancestral 0 98 Crystal 12 98 Synth Drum Comp 14 98 Popcorn 18 98 Tiny Bells 35 98 Round Glockenspiel 40 98 Glockenspiel Chimes 41 98 Clear Bells 42 98 Chorus Bells 64 98 Synth Mallet 65 98 Soft Crystal 66 98 Loud Glockenspiel 67 98 Christmas Bells Bank Select Voice No. MSB 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 528 0 MIDI Program Voice Name LSB Change# 68 98 Vibraphone Bells 69 98 Digital Bells 70 98 Air Bells 71 98 Bell Harp 72 98 Gamelimba 0 99 Atmosphere 18 99 Warm Atmosphere 19 99 Hollow Release 40 99 Nylon Electric Piano 64 99 Nylon Harp 65 99 Harp Vox 66 99 Atmosphere Pad 67 99 Planet 0 100 Brightness 64 100 Fantasy Bells 96 100 Smokey 0 101 Goblins 64 101 Goblins Synth 65 101 Creeper 66 101 Ring Pad 67 101 Ritual 68 101 To Heaven 70 101 Night 71 101 Glisten 96 101 Bell Choir 0 102 Echoes 8 102 Echoes 2 14 102 Echo Pan 64 102 Echo Bells 65 102 Big Pan 66 102 Synth Piano 67 102 Creation 68 102 Star Dust 69 102 Resonant & Panning 0 103 Sci-Fi 64 103 Starz WORLD 0 104 Sitar 32 104 Detuned Sitar 35 104 Sitar 2 96 104 Tambra 97 104 Tamboura 0 105 Banjo 28 105 Muted Banjo 96 105 Rabab 97 105 Gopichant 98 105 Oud 0 106 Shamisen 0 107 Koto 96 107 Taisho-kin 97 107 Kanoon 0 108 Kalimba 0 109 Bagpipe 0 110 Fiddle 0 111 Shanai 64 111 Shanai 2 96 111 Pungi 97 111 Hichiriki PERCUSSIVE 0 112 Tinkle Bell 83 Voice List 84 Bank Select Voice No. MSB 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 MIDI Program Voice Name LSB Change# 96 112 Bonang 97 112 Altair 98 112 Gamelan Gongs 99 112 Stereo Gamelan Gongs 100 112 Rama Cymbal 101 112 Asian Bells 0 113 Agogo 0 114 Steel Drums 97 114 Glass Percussion 98 114 Thai Bells 0 115 Woodblock 96 115 Castanets 0 116 Taiko Drum 96 116 Gran Cassa 0 117 Melodic Tom 64 117 Melodic Tom 2 65 117 Real Tom 66 117 Rock Tom 0 118 Synth Drum 64 118 Analog Tom 65 118 Electronic Percussion 0 119 Reverse Cymbal SOUND EFFECTS 0 120 Fret Noise 0 121 Breath Noise 0 122 Seashore 0 123 Bird Tweet 0 124 Telephone Ring 0 125 Helicopter 0 126 Applause 0 127 Gunshot 0 0 Cutting Noise 0 1 Cutting Noise 2 0 3 String Slap 0 16 Flute Key Click 0 32 Shower 0 33 Thunder 0 34 Wind 0 35 Stream 0 36 Bubble 0 37 Feed 0 48 Dog 0 49 Horse 0 50 Bird Tweet 2 0 54 Ghost 0 55 Maou 0 64 Phone Call 0 65 Door Squeak 0 66 Door Slam 0 67 Scratch Cut 0 68 Scratch Split 0 69 Wind Chime 0 70 Telephone Ring 2 0 80 Car Engine Ignition 0 81 Car Tires Squeal 0 82 Car Passing 0 83 Car Crash 0 84 Siren 0 85 Train 0 86 Jet Plane Bank Select Voice No. MSB LSB 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MIDI Program Change# 87 88 89 90 96 97 98 99 100 112 113 114 115 Voice Name Starship Burst Roller Coaster Submarine Laugh Scream Punch Heartbeat Footsteps Machine Gun Laser Gun Explosion Firework ● DJ Voice List Bank Select Voice No. MSB LSB 601 602 603 604 605 0 0 0 0 0 123 123 123 123 123 MIDI Program Change# DJ 118 119 120 121 122 Voice Name DJ Set 1 DJ Set 2 DJ Set 3 DJ Set 4 DJ Set 5 Voice List ● DJ Voice List Voice No. MSB/LSB/PC No. Note 036 C 1 037 C# 1 038 D 1 039 D# 1 040 E 1 041 F 1 042 F# 1 043 G 1 044 G# 1 045 A 1 046 A# 1 047 B 1 048 C 2 049 C# 2 050 D 2 051 D# 2 052 E 2 053 F 2 054 F# 2 055 G 2 056 G# 2 057 A 2 058 A# 2 059 B 2 060 C 3 061 C# 3 062 D 3 063 D# 3 064 E 3 065 F 3 066 F# 3 067 G 3 068 G# 3 069 A 3 070 A# 3 071 B 3 072 C 4 073 C# 4 074 D 4 075 D# 4 076 E 4 077 F 4 078 F# 4 079 G 4 080 G# 4 081 A 4 082 A# 4 083 B 4 084 C 5 085 C# 5 086 D 5 087 D# 5 088 E 5 089 F 5 090 F# 5 091 G 5 092 G# 5 093 A 5 094 A# 5 095 B 5 096 C 6 601 000/123/118 DJ Set 1 BD Analog H Analog Side Stick Analog Snare 1 Hand Clap Analog Snare 2 Analog Tom 1 Analog HH Closed 1 Analog Tom 2 Analog HH Closed 2 Analog Tom 3 Analog HH Open Analog Tom 4 Analog Tom 5 Analog Cymbal Analog Tom 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine 602 000/123/119 DJ Set 2 Bass Drum Soft Side Stick Snare M Hand Clap Snare H Hard Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine 603 000/123/120 DJ Set 3 BD Analog H Analog Side Stick Analog Snare 1 Hand Clap Analog Snare 2 Analog Tom 1 Analog HH Closed 1 Analog Tom 2 Analog HH Closed 2 Analog Tom 3 Analog HH Open Analog Tom 4 Analog Tom 5 Analog Cymbal Analog Tom 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine 604 000/123/121 DJ Set 4 BD Analog H Analog Side Stick Analog Snare 1 Hand Clap Analog Snare 2 Analog Tom 1 Analog HH Closed 1 Analog Tom 2 Analog HH Closed 2 Analog Tom 3 Analog HH Open Analog Tom 4 Analog Tom 5 Analog Cymbal Analog Tom 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine 605 000/123/122 DJ Set 5 BD Analog H Analog Side Stick Analog Snare 1 Hand Clap Analog Snare 2 Analog Tom 1 Analog HH Closed 1 Analog Tom 2 Analog HH Closed 2 Analog Tom 3 Analog HH Open Analog Tom 4 Analog Tom 5 Analog Cymbal Analog Tom 6 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Ohh2 FX01 ORCH signal Go FX02 Onemoretime Onemoretime Uhh-Hit Huea Joo Reverse Huihu FXTBrs Huea GetUp Ohh1 Go Scratch 1 Scratch 2 Scratch 3 Scratch 4 Scratch 5 Go Ohh2 Heau FX02 Huihu GetUp Reverse signal Scratch 1 Scratch 2 Scratch 3 Scratch 4 Scratch 5 GetUp signal Joo FXTBrs Go Huihu FX01 ComeOn Scratch 1 Scratch 2 Scratch 3 Scratch 4 Scratch 5 Huihu Joo ComeOn Onemoretime Go GetUp Huea Ohh2 Scratch 1 Scratch 2 Scratch 3 Scratch 4 Scratch 5 GetUp Reverse Joo FX01 Ohh1 Ohh2 Onemoretime ComeOn Scratch 1 Scratch 2 Scratch 3 Scratch 4 Scratch 5 85 Style List Style No. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 86 Style Name 8Beat 8BeatModern 60’sGtrPop 8BeatAdria 60’s8Beat 8Beat OffBeat 60’sRock HardRock RockShuffle 8BeatRock 16Beat 16Beat PopShuffle1 PopShuffle2 GuitarPop 16BtUptempo KoolShuffle JazzRock HipHopLight Ballad PianoBallad LoveSong 6/8ModernEP 6/8SlowRock OrganBallad PopBallad 16BeatBallad1 16BeatBallad2 Dance EuroTrance Ibiza HouseMusik SwingHouse TechnoPolis Clubdance ClubLatin Garage1 Garage2 TechnoParty UKPop HipHopGroove HipShuffle HipHopPop Disco 70’sDisco1 70’sDisco2 LatinDisco DiscoPhilly SaturdayNight DiscoChocolate DiscoHands Style No. 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 Style Name Swing&Jazz BigBandFast BigBandMid BigBandBallad BigBandShfl JazzClub Swing1 Swing2 Five/Four JazzBallad Dixieland Ragtime AfroCuban Charleston R&B Soul DetroitPop1 60’sRock&Roll 6/8Soul CrocoTwist Rock&Roll DetroitPop2 BoogieWoogie ComboBoogie 6/8Blues Country Country8Beat CountryPop CountrySwing Country2/4 CowboyBoogie CountryShuffle Bluegrass Latin BrazilianSamba BossaNova PopBossa Tijuana DiscoLatin Mambo Salsa Beguine GypsyRumba RmbFlamenca RumbaIsland Reggae Ballroom VienneseWaltz EnglishWaltz Slowfox Foxtrot Quickstep Style No. 095 096 097 098 099 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 Style Name Tango Pasodoble Samba ChaChaCha Rumba Jive Traditional USMarch 6/8March GermanMarch PolkaPop OberPolka Tarantella Showtune ChristmasSwing ChristmasWaltz ScottishReel Hawaiian Waltz GuitarSerenade SwingWaltz JazzWaltz1 JazzWaltz2 CountryWaltz OberWalzer Musette DJ DJ-HipHop DJ-DanceSwing DJ-House DJ-GarageHouse DJ-PopR&B Pianist Stride PianoSwing PianoRag Arpeggio Musical Habanera SlowRock 8BeatPianoBallad PianoMarch 6/8PianoMarch PianoWaltz PianoBeguine Music Database List M.D.B. No. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 M.D.B. Name POP HITS AlvFever Croco Rk DayPdise EasySday GoMyWay HowDeep! HurryLuv I’m Torn Imagine ISurvive JustCall JustWay NikitTrp ProudGtr SailngSx Sept.Pop SultanSw SweetLrd ThnkMsic TitanicH WatchGrl WhatALoo WhitePle YestDGtr SWING & JAZZ Alex Rag Blue Set DayOfW&R HighMoon MistySax MoonLit New York PanthrSw PatrolBr PatrolSx PetiteCl RedRoses SaintMch SatinWd SaxMood SF Heart ShearJz Showbiz SplnkyTb SunnySde TstHoney TwoFoot5 WhatsNew Wild Cat WondrLnd EASY LISTENING BlackFst CaliBlue CiaoCpri Close2U DAmorStr DolanesM ElCondor Entrtain Frippers LuckySax LuvStory MyPrince OSoleMio PalomaGt PuppetBr Raindrop RedMouln R’ticGtr Schiwago ShadowGt SingRain M.D.B. No. 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 M.D.B. Name SmallWld SpkSoft SpnishEy StrangeN TieRibbn TimeGoes WhteXmas WishStar WondrWld ROMANTIC BALLADS AdelineB ArgenCry BeautBdy Bl Bayou CatMemry CavaSolo E Weiss ElvGhett Feeling Fly Away Fnl Date GreenSlv GtCncert HrdToSay LonlyPan MBoxDnce Mn Rivr Norw.Flt OnMyMnd OverRbow Red Lady ReleseMe SavingLv Shore Cl SierraMd SilverMn SmokyEye SndOfSil TblWater WhisprSx ROCK & FUSION DavAgain JumpRock OyComCha PickUpPc RdRiverR SatsfyGt Sheriff SmokeWtr TwistAgn VenusPop RHYTHM & BLUES AmazingG BoogiePf Clock Rk CU later HappyDay JohnnyB MercyBrs RisingSn S Preems SuperStv Yeh Orgn HIP HOP HOUSE 2 of US B Leave Back St FunkyTwn KillSoft MiamiTrn Nine PM SharpRap SingBack StrandD M.D.B. No. 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 M.D.B. Name LATIN NIGHTS BambaBrs BambaFlt BeHappy! CopaLola DayNight Ipanema MarinaAc MuchoTrb SmoothLt SunOfLif Sunshine Tico Org TrbWave COUNTRY & WESTERN BlownWnd Bonanza BoxerGtr CntryRds GreenGrs Jambala LondonSt LooseEL TopWorld YlwRose DISCO & PARTY AlhHwaii Babylon Barbados BirdySyn FestaMex HandsPty LuvTheme ModrnTlk NxtAlice PalomaFl PubPiano Tijuana Why MCA? BALLROOM BrazilBr CherryBr CherryOr DanubeWv MantoStr SandmnFx SundyNvr TangoPiz Tea4Two TulipWtz YesSirQk TRADITIONAL AlpenTri Balalaik Ceilidh CielPari Cl Polka Comrades Funiculi HappyPlk Herzlin HornPipe JinglBel Kufstein MexiHat MickyFlt NavyAway RlBarrel SnowWtz StarMrch WashPost WdCuttrs XmasWalz 87 Drum Kit List • “ ” indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1”. • Each percussion voice uses one note. • The MIDI Note # and Note are actually one octave lower than keyboard Note # and Note. For example, in “109: Standard Kit 1”, the “Seq Click H” (Note# 36/Note C1) corresponds to (Note# 24/Note C0). • Key Off: Keys marked “O” stop sounding the instant they are released. • Voices with the same Alternate Note Number (*1 … 4) cannot be played simultaneously. (They are designed to be played alternately with each other.) Voice No. MSB/LSB/PC MIDI Key Alternate Keyboard Note# C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 A#5 C6 88 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Note# 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Off assign 3 3 4 4 O O O 1 1 1 O O O 2 2 109 127/000/000 110 127/000/001 111 127/000/008 112 127/000/016 113 127/000/024 114 127/000/025 Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Analog Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch Push Scratch Pull Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare H Soft Sticks Bass Drum Soft Open Rim Shot Bass Drum Hard Bass Drum Side Stick Snare M Hand Clap Snare H Hard Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Snare H Soft 2 Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal Hi Q 2 Snare L Hi Q 2 SD Rock H Bass Drum H Bass Drum H Bass Drum H BD Rock BD Rock BD Gate BD Analog L BD Analog H Analog Side Stick Analog Snare 1 SD Rock H Open Rim Shot 2 Bass Drum 2 Snare M 2 SD Room L SD Rock L SD Rock L Snare H Hard 2 SD Room H Room Tom 1 SD Rock Rim Rock Tom 1 SD Rock H E Tom 1 Room Tom 2 Rock Tom 2 E Tom 2 Room Tom 3 Rock Tom 3 E Tom 3 Room Tom 4 Room Tom 5 Rock Tom 4 Rock Tom 5 E Tom 4 E Tom 5 Room Tom 6 Rock Tom 6 E Tom 6 Analog Snare 2 Analog Tom 1 Analog HH Closed 1 Analog Tom 2 Analog HH Closed 2 Analog Tom 3 Analog HH Open Analog Tom 4 Analog Tom 5 Analog Cymbal Analog Tom 6 Analog Cowbell Analog Conga H Analog Conga M Analog Conga L Analog Maracas Analog Claves Scratch Push Scratch Pull Scratch Push Scratch Pull Drum Kit List Voice No. MSB/LSB/PC MIDI Key Alternate Keyboard Note# C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 A#5 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Note# 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Off 109 127/000/000 Standard Kit 1 115 127/000/027 Dance Kit 116 127/000/032 Jazz Kit 117 127/000/040 Brush Kit 118 127/000/048 Symphony Kit 119 126/000/000 SFX Kit 1 120 126/000/001 SFX Kit 2 assign 3 3 4 4 O O O 1 1 1 O O O 2 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch Push Scratch Pull Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare H Soft Sticks Bass Drum Soft Open Rim Shot Bass Drum Hard Bass Drum Side Stick Snare M Hand Clap Snare H Hard Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Reverse Cymbal Hi Q 2 AnSD Snappy AnBD Dance-1 AnSD OpenRim AnBD Dance-2 AnBD Dance-3 Analog Side Stick AnSD Q AnSD Ana+Acoustic Analog Tom 1 Analog HH Closed 3 Analog Tom 2 Analog HH Closed 4 Analog Tom 3 Analog HH Open 2 Analog Tom 4 Analog Tom 5 Analog Cymbal Analog Tom 6 Analog Cowbell Analog Conga H Analog Conga M Analog Conga L Analog Maracas SD Jazz H Light Brush Slap L Bass Drum L BD Jazz BD Jazz Gran Cassa Gran Cassa Mute SD Jazz L Brush Slap Marching Sn M SD Jazz M Jazz Tom 1 Brush Tap Marching Sn H Brush Tom 1 Jazz Tom 1 Jazz Tom 2 Brush Tom 2 Jazz Tom 2 Jazz Tom 3 Brush Tom 3 Jazz Tom 3 Jazz Tom 4 Jazz Tom 5 Brush Tom 4 Jazz Tom 4 Brush Tom 5 Jazz Tom 5 Hand Cym. L Brush Tom 6 Jazz Tom 6 Hand Cym.Short L Jazz Tom 6 Cutting Noise Phone Call Cutting Noise 2 Door Squeak Door Slam String Slap Scratch Cut Scratch Wind Chime Telephone Ring 2 Flute Key Click Car Engine Ignition Car Tires Squeal Car Passing Car Crash Siren Hand Cym. H Train Jet Plane Hand Cym.Short H Starship Burst Roller Coaster Submarine Shower Thunder Wind Stream Bubble Feed Laugh Scream Punch Heartbeat FootSteps Dog Horse Bird Tweet 2 Machine Gun Laser Gun Explosion Firework Analog Claves Scratch Push Scratch Pull Ghost Maou 89 MIDI Implementation Chart YAMAHA [ Portable Keyboard ] Model PSR-292 MIDI Implementation Chart Transmitted Date:25-Jan-2002 Version : 1.0 Recognized Remarks Function... Basic Channel Default Changed 1 - 16 x 1 - 16 x Mode Default Messages Altered 3 x ************** 3 x x Note Number 0 - 127 : True voice ************** 0 - 127 0 - 127 Velocity Note ON Note OFF o 9nH,v=1-127 o 9nH,v=0 o 9nH,v=1-127 o 9nH,v=0 or 8nH After Touch Key's Ch's x x x x x o Pitch Bend Control Change Prog Change 0,32 1 6 38 7 10 11 64 71 72 73 74 84 91,93,94 96,97 100,101 : True # System Exclusive : Song Pos. : Song Sel. : Tune o x x x o o x o x x x x x o x x *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o 0 - 127 ************** o 0 - 127 o o *3 x x x x x x System : Clock Real Time: Commands o o o o Aux o x x x o x Common :All Sound OFF :Reset All Cntrls :Local ON/OFF :All Notes OFF Mes- :Active Sense sages:Reset 90 *1 Mode 1 : OMNI ON , POLY Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY *4 Bank Select Modulation wheel Data Entry(MSB) Data Entry(LSB) Part Volume Pan Expression Sustain Harmonic Content Release Time Attack Time Brightness Portamento Cntrl Effect Depth RPN Inc,Dec RPN LSB,MSB *3 *4 o(120,126,127) o(121) o(122) *5 o(123-125) o x Mode 2 : OMNI ON ,MONO Mode 4 : OMNI OFF,MONO o : Yes x : No MIDI Implementation Chart NOTE: *1 By default (factory settings) the PSR-292 ordinarily functions as a 16-channel multi-timbral tone generator, and incoming data does not affect the panel voices or panel settings. However, the MIDI messages listed below do affect the panel voices, auto accompaniment, and songs. • MIDI Master Tuning • System exclusive messages for changing the Reverb Type, Chorus Type, and DSP Type. *2 Messages for these control change numbers cannot be transmitted from the PSR-292 itself. However, they may be transmitted when playing the accompaniment, song or using the Harmony effect. *3 Exclusive <GM System ON> F0H, 7EH, 7FH, 09H, 01H, F7H • This message automatically restores all default settings for the instrument, with the exception of MIDI Master Tuning. <MIDI Master Volume> F0H, 7FH, 7FH, 04H, 01H, ll, mm, F7H • This message allows the volume of all channels to be changed simultaneously (Universal System Exclusive). • The values of “mm” is used for MIDI Master Tuning. (Values for “ll” are ignored.) <MIDI Master Tuning> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 27H, 30H, 00H, 00H, mm, ll, cc, F7H • This message simultaneously changes the tuning value of all channels. • The values of “mm” and “ll” are used for MIDI Master Tuning. • The default value of “mm” and “ll” are 08H and 00H, respectively. Any values can be used for “n” and “cc.” <Reverb Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 00H, mmH, llH, F7H • mm : Reverb Type MSB • ll : Reverb Type LSB Refer to the Effect Map (page 92) for details. <Chorus Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 20H, mmH, llH, F7H • mm : Chorus Type MSB • ll : Chorus Type LSB Refer to the Effect Map (page 92) for details. <DSP Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 40H, mmH, llH, F7H • mm : DSP Type MSB • ll : DSP Type LSB Refer to the Effect Map (page 92) for details. <DRY Level> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 08H, 0mH, 11H, llH, F7H • ll : Dry Level • 0m : Channel Number <XG Parametter Change> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, hh, mm, ll, dd, F7H • hh mm ll : address • dd : data <XG Bulk Dump> F0H, 43H, 0nH, 4CH, aa, bb, hh, mm, ll, dd, cc, F7H • 0n : Device Number n=0 (send), 0 - f (receive) • aa bb : Byte Count (aa << 7) + bb • hh mm ll : address • dd : data <Sequence Recording Bulk Dump> F0H, 43H, 73H, 7FH, mID, 06H, 0AH, aa, bb, cc, dd, hh, mm, ll, bulk data, sum, F7H • mID : model ID PSR-292=2BH • 06H : Bulk ID • 0AH : Bulk No. • aa : Byte Count MSB • bb : Byte Count LSB • cc : amount of valid MSB data • dd : amount of valid LSB data • hh mm ll : address • bulk data : Sequence data (1byte, 2byte...7byte, MSB data) • sum : Check Sum = 0-sum (bulk data) <One Touch Setting Bulk Dump> F0H, 43H, 73H, 7FH, mID, 06H, 09H, aa, bb, cc, dd, hh, mm, ll, bulk data, sum, F7H • mID : model ID PSR-292=2BH • 06H : Bulk ID • 09H : Bulk No. • aa : Byte Count MSB • bb : Byte Count LSB • cc : amount of valid MSB data • dd : amount of valid LSB data • hh mm ll : address • bulk data : Sequence data (low 4bit, high 4 bit...low 4bit, high 4 bit) • sum : Check Sum = 0-sum (bulk data) *4 When the accompaniment is started, an FAH message is transmitted. When accompaniment is stopped, an FCH message is transmitted.When the clock is set to External, both FAH (accompaniment start) and FCH (accompaniment stop) are recognized. *5 Local ON/OFF <Local ON> Bn, 7A, 7F <Local OFF> Bn, 7A, 00 Value for “n” is ignored. 91 Effect map MIDI Implementation Chart ■ Effect map * If the received value does not contain an effect type in the TYPE LSB, the LSB will be directed to TYPE 0. * The numbers in parentheses in front of the Effect Type names correspond to the number indicated in the display.. * By using an external sequencer, which is capable of editing and transmitting the system exclusive messages and parameter changes, you can select the Reverb, Chorus and DSP effect types which are not accessible from the PSR-292 panel itself. When one of the effects is selected by the external sequencer, “ - ” will be shown on the display. ● REVERB TYPE MSB 00 000 No Effect 001 (1)Hall1 002 Room 003 Stage 004 Plate 005...127 No Effect 01 02 08 TYPE LSB 16 (5)Stage1 (7)Plate1 17 18 (2)Hall2 (3)Room1 (6)Stage2 (8)Plate2 19 20 (4)Room2 ● CHORUS TYPE MSB 00 000...064 No Effect 065 Chorus 066 Celeste 067 Flanger 068...127 No Effect 01 02 08 TYPE LSB 16 17 18 19 20 18 19 20 Chorus2 Flanger1 Chorus1 Flanger2 ● DSP TYPE LSB 00 01 02 08 16 000 No Effect 001 (1)Hall1 002 Room 003 Stage (5)Stage1 004 Plate (7)Plate1 005 Delay L,C,R (26)Delay L,C,R 006 (27)Delay L,R 007 (28)Echo 008 (29)Cross Delay (9)Early Reflection1 (10)Early Reflection2 009 010 (11)Gate Reverb 011 (12)Reverse Gate 012...019 No Effect 020 (30)Karaoke 021...064 No Effect 065 Chorus (14)Chorus2 066 Celeste (15)Flanger1 067 Flanger 068 Symphonic (17)Symphonic (19)Rotary Speaker1 069 Rotary Speaker 070 Tremolo (21)Tremolo1 071 Auto Pan (24)Auto Pan 072 (18)Phaser 073 Distortion 074 (33)Overdrive (34)Amp Simulation (31)Distortion Hard 075 076 (36)3Band EQ 077 (37)2Band EQ 078 Auto Wah (25)Auto Wah 079...127 No Effect TYPE MSB 92 17 (2)Hall2 (3)Room1 (6)Stage2 (8)Plate2 (4)Room2 (13)Chorus1 (16)Flanger2 (20)Rotary Speaker2 (22)Tremolo2 (23)Guitar Tremolo (32)Distortion Soft (35)EQ Telephone Specifications Keyboards • 61 standard-size keys (C1 - C6), with Touch Response. Display • Large multi-function LCD display (backlit) Setup • STANDBY/ON • MASTER VOLUME : MIN - MAX Panel Controls • SONG, VOICE, STYLE, M.D.B., DICTIONARY, DJ, PC, LESSON L, R, METRONOME, PORTABLE GRAND, DEMO, FUNCTION(TRANSPOSE), TOUCH, HARMONY, DUAL, SPLIT, TEMPO/TAP, ONE TOUCH SETTING, [0][9], [+](YES), [-](NO), CATEGORY, SELECT, Dial Voice • 108 panel voices + 12 drum kits + 480 XG voices + 5 DJ voices • Polyphony : 32 • DUAL • SPLIT Style • 135 styles • Style Control : ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC STOP, SYNC START, START/STOP, INTRO ENDING, MAIN/AUTO FILL • Fingering : Multi fingering • Style Volume Music Database • 208 Yamaha Educational Suite • Dictionary • Lesson 1-4 One Touch Setting • Preset A and B (for each style) • Memory Function • Transpose, Tuning, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Main Voice – Volume; Octave; Pan; Reverb Send Level; Chorus Send Level; DSP Send Level, Dual Voice – Voice; Volume; Octave; Pan; Reverb Send Level; Chorus Send Level; DSP Send Level, Split Voice – Voice; Volume; Octave; Pan; Reverb Send Level; Chorus Send Level; DSP Send Level, Reverb Type, Chorus Type, DSP Type, Harmony Type, Harmony Volume, Local On/Off, External Clock, Bulk Data Send, Initial Setup Send, Keyboard Out, Style Out, Song Out, Style Volume, Song Volume, Metronome Volume, Time Signature, Lesson Track (R), Lesson Track (L), Grade On/Off, Demo and DJ Cancel MIDI • Local On/Off • Initial Setup Send • External Clock • Bulk Data Send • Keyboard Out • Style Out • Song Out Auxiliary jacks • PHONES/OUTPUT, DC IN 12V, MIDI IN/OUT, SUSTAIN Amplifier • 3.0W + 3.0W Speakers • 12cm x 2 + 3cm x 2 Power Consumption (when using PA-3C power adaptor) • UL/CSA :14W • CE :15W Power Supply • Adaptor : Yamaha PA-3C AC power adaptor • Batteries : Six “D” size, R20P (LR20) or equivalent batteries Dimensions (W x D x H) • 952 x 389 x 140 mm (37-1/2" x 15-1/3" x 5-1/2") Weight • 6.8 kg (15 lbs.) Supplied Accessories • Music Stand • Owner’s Manual • Song Book Optional Accessories • • • • Headphones : HPE-150 AC power adaptor : PA-3B/3C Footswitch : FC4, FC5 Keyboard stand : L-2C * Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. Effects • • • • Reverb : 8 types Chorus : 4 types DSP : 38 types Harmony : 26 types Song • 100 Songs + 5 User Songs + Flash Memory • Song Clear, Track Clear • Song Volume Recording • Song User Song : 5 Songs Recording Tracks : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, STYLE 93 Index Panel controls and terminals +/- ............................................... 9, 24 A-B REPEAT.............................. 9, 53 ACMP ......................................... 9, 36 CATEGORY ............................... 8, 23 DC IN 12V ................................. 9, 10 DEMO ........................................ 8, 14 Dial ............................................. 8, 24 DICTIONARY............................ 8, 45 DJ................................................ 8, 22 DUAL ......................................... 8, 26 FF................................................ 9, 53 FUNCTION................................ 8, 74 HARMONY ............................... 8, 31 INTRO ENDING........................ 9, 36 LEFT................................................53 LESSON ..................................... 8, 62 M.D.B. ........................................ 8, 48 MAIN/AUTO FILL .................... 9, 36 MASTER VOLUME .........................8 MEMORY .................................. 9, 29 METRONOME .......................... 8, 20 MIDI IN...................................... 9, 67 MIDI OUT.................................. 9, 67 NO ........................................ 9, 59, 60 Numeric keypad.......................... 9, 24 ONE TOUCH SETTING............ 9, 28 PAUSE ........................................ 9, 53 PC ............................................... 8, 73 PHONES/OUTPUT.................... 9, 11 PORTABLE GRAND................. 8, 20 REC .................................................57 RECORD...........................................9 REW ........................................... 9, 53 RIGHT.............................................53 SELECT ..................................... 8, 24 SONG .............................8, 51, 57, 61 SONG MEMORY ...................... 9, 57 SPLIT ......................................... 8, 27 STANDBY/ON........................... 8, 11 START/STOP ....................... 9, 36, 53 STYLE........................................ 8, 35 SUSTAIN.................................... 9, 11 SYNC START ............................ 9, 36 SYNC STOP............................... 9, 36 TEMPO/TAP ........................ 9, 20, 41 TOUCH ...................................... 8, 30 VOICE ........................................ 8, 23 YES....................................... 9, 59, 60 Misc. I #000 OTS ........................................ 26 Indicator .......................................... 18 Initial Setup Send ............................ 69 Initialization .................................... 78 Internal Clock.................................. 69 Intro ................................................. 38 A A-B repreat ..................................... 54 AC Power adaptor ........................... 10 accessory jacks................................ 11 accompaniment sections ................. 42 Accompaniment Split Point ............ 27 Batteries .......................................... 10 Beat display..................................... 51 beat marks ....................................... 51 Bulk................................................. 69 Left .................................................. 62 Lesson ............................................. 61 Lesson Track ................................... 63 Level, chorus send........................... 32 Level, DSP send .............................. 32 Level, reverb send ........................... 31 Local on/off ..................................... 69 C M B Chord Names .................................. 47 Chord Track .................................... 57 Chord Type...................................... 47 Chords, About ................................. 46 Chords, Fingered............................. 43 Chords, Single Finger ..................... 43 Chorus............................................. 32 Clearing, Song ................................ 59 D DEMO Cancel................................. 14 Demo song ...................................... 14 Dictionary ....................................... 45 DJ .................................................... 22 Drum Kit Voice Chart ..................... 88 DSP ................................................. 32 Dual Voice....................................... 26 E Effects ............................................. 31 Ending............................................. 36 External Clock ................................ 69 F Fill-in .............................................. 42 Fingered chords............................... 43 Flash memory ........................... 71, 78 Footswitch....................................... 11 Function .......................................... 74 M.D.B. (music database)................. 48 Main A/B......................................... 42 Main Voice....................................... 25 Master Volume................................... 8 Melody Voice Change ..................... 55 Metronome ...................................... 20 MIDI................................................ 66 MIDI channels................................. 67 MIDI Implementation Chart ........... 90 MIDI LSB Receive cancel .............. 70 MIDI terminals................................ 67 Multi Fingering ............................... 43 Music Stand..................................... 19 O Octave.............................................. 19 Octave, dual..................................... 26 Octave, main.................................... 25 Octave, split..................................... 27 One Touch Setting ........................... 28 P Pan, dual .......................................... 26 Pan, main......................................... 25 Pan, split .......................................... 27 PC.................................................... 73 Portable Grand ................................ 20 Q G Quick Guide .................................... 12 GM System Level 1 ........................ 66 Grade............................................... 65 R H Harmony ......................................... 31 Headphones..................................... 11 94 L recording, song ................................ 56 Reverb ............................................. 31 Right................................................ 62 Root ................................................. 46 Index S T V sections (accompaniment) ...............42 Single Finger chords........................43 Song Clear .......................................59 Song Filer ........................................72 Song Volume....................................55 songs, playing ..................................53 songs, recording...............................56 songs, selecting................................51 Specifications...................................93 Split Point ........................................27 Split Voice........................................27 Style Volume....................................42 styles, playing ..................................36 styles, selecting................................35 Sync Start.........................................37 Sync Stop.........................................40 Tap................................................... 37 Tempo ....................................... 20, 41 Time Signature................................ 21 Touch Sensitivity............................. 30 track (song) ..................................... 57 tracks, muting.................................. 58 Transpose ........................................ 29 Troubleshooting .............................. 77 Tuning ............................................. 29 Voice List......................................... 79 voices, Drum Kit ............................. 88 voices, selecting and playing........... 23 voices, XG....................................... 80 Volume, dual.................................... 26 Volume, harmony ............................ 31 Volume, main .................................. 25 Volume, Metronome........................ 21 Volume, Song .................................. 55 Volume, split.................................... 27 Volume, Style .................................. 42 U User songs....................................... 56 X XG voices........................................ 80 95 Limited Warranty 90 DAYS LABOR 1 YEAR PARTS Yamaha Corporation of America, hereafter referred to as Yamaha, warrants to the original consumer of a product included in the categories listed below, that the product will be free of defects in materials and/or workmanship for the periods indicated. This warranty is applicable to all models included in the following series of products: PSR SERIES OF PORTATONE ELECTRONIC KEYBOARDS If during the first 90 days that immediately follows the purchase date, your new Yamaha product covered by this warranty is found to have a defect in material and/or workmanship, Yamaha and/or its authorized representative will repair such defect without charge for parts or labor. If parts should be required after this 90 day period but within the one year period that immediately follows the purchase date, Yamaha will, subject to the terms of this warranty, supply these parts without charge. However, charges for labor, and/or any miscellaneous expenses incurred are the consumers responsibility. Yamaha reserves the right to utilize reconditioned parts in repairing these products and/or to use reconditioned units as warranty replacements. THIS WARRANTY IS THE ONLY EXPRESS WARRANTY WHICH YAMAHA MAKES IN CONNECTION WITH THESE PRODUCTS. ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF MERCHANT ABILITY IS LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY. YAMAHA EXCLUDES AND SHALL NOT BE LIABLE IN ANY EVENT FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Some states do not allow limitations that relate to implied warranties and/or the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages. Therefore, these limitations and exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights which vary from state to state. CONSUMERS RESPONSIBILITIES If warranty service should be required, it is necessary that the consumer assume certain responsibilities: 1. Contact the Customer Service Department of the retailer selling the product, or any retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product for assistance. You may also contact Yamaha directly at the address provided below. 2. Deliver the unit to be serviced under warranty to: the retailer selling the product, an authorized service center, or to Yamaha with an explanation of the problem. Please be prepared to provide proof purchase date (sales receipt, credit card copy, etc.) when requesting service and/or parts under warranty. 3. Shipping and/or insurance costs are the consumers responsibility.* Units shipped for service should be packed securely. *Repaired units will be returned PREPAID if warranty service is required within the first 90 days. IMPORTANT: Do NOT ship anything to ANY location without prior authorization. A Return Authorization (RA) will be issued that has a tracking number assigned that will expedite the servicing of your unit and provide a tracking system if needed. 4. Your owners manual contains important safety and operating instructions. It is your responsibility to be aware of the contents of this manual and to follow all safety precautions. EXCLUSIONS This warranty does not apply to units whose trade name, trademark, and/or ID numbers have been altered, defaced, exchanged removed, or to failures and/or damages that may occur as a result of: 1. Neglect, abuse, abnormal strain, modification or exposure to extremes in temperature or humidity. 2. Improper repair or maintenance by any person who is not a service representative of a retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product, an authorized service center, or an authorized service representative of Yamaha. 3. This warranty is applicable only to units sold by retailers authorized by Yamaha to sell these products in the U.S.A., the District of Columbia, and Puerto Rico. This warranty is not applicable in other possessions or territories of the U.S.A. or in any other country. Please record the model and serial number of the product you have purchased in the spaces provided below. Model___________________________ Serial #________________________________ Sales Slip #________________________________ Purchased from____________________________________________________________ (Retailer) Date______________________________________ YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA Electronic Service Division 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue Buena Park, CA 90620 KEEP THIS DOCUMENT FOR YOUR RECORDS. DO NOT MAIL! For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo. Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Belgium Rue de Geneve (Genevastraat) 10, 1140 - Brussels, Belgium Tel: 02-726 6032 FRANCE U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V., Departamento de ventas Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F. Tel: 55-5804-0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA. Av. Rebouças 2636, São Paulo, Brasil Tel: 011-3085-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Sucursal de Argentina Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053, Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 1-4371-7021 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: +507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 IRELAND Danfay Ltd. 61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin Tel: 01-2859177 GERMANY Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 ASIA BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Musique France BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A. Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha-Hazen Música, S.A. Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain Tel: 91-639-8888 GREECE Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece Tel: 01-228 2160 SWEDEN THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd. 25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West), Jingan, Shanghai, China Tel: 021-6247-2211 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. Tong-Yang Securities Bldg. 16F 23-8 Yoido-dong, Youngdungpo-ku, Seoul, Korea Tel: 02-3770-0660 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-78030900 Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1 Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 PHILIPPINES DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 8B DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 FINLAND F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. No.11 Ubi Road 1, No.06-02, Meiban Industrial Building, Singapore Tel: 747-4374 TAIWAN NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Næringspark 1 N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120 IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei. Taiwan 104, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2511-8688 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 891/1 Siam Motors Building, 15-16 floor Rama 1 road, Wangmai, Pathumwan Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: 02-215-2626 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-3030 Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2317 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Switzerland Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: 01-383 3990 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900 THE NETHERLANDS Yamaha Music Central Europe, Branch Nederland Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: 0347-358 040 OCEANIA AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971-4-881-5868 AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd. 146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa, Auckland, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-3273 [PK] 32 Yamaha PK CLUB (Portable Keyboard Home Page, English only) http://www.yamahaPKclub.com/ Yamaha Manual Library http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/ U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation © 2002 Yamaha Corporation V874220 ???PO???.?-01C0 Printed in China